Visual Vocabulary G1 (WWW - Irlanguage.com) PDF

Grade 1
Contents
Unit 1
Unit 4
Week 1 Key Vocabulary...........................................................................1

Function Words and Phrases ................................................7
Basic Words ...............................................................................11
Week 2 Key Vocabulary........................................................................ 13
Function Words and Phrases ............................................. 19
Basic Words .............................................................................. 23
Basic Words .............................................................................. 35
Basic Words .............................................................................. 47
Basic Words .............................................................................. 59
Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................181

Function Words and Phrases ...........................................189
Basic Words ............................................................................193
Basic Words ............................................................................207
Basic Words ............................................................................221
Basic Words ............................................................................235
Basic Words ............................................................................249
Unit 2
Unit 5

Basic Words .............................................................................. 71
Basic Words .............................................................................. 83
Basic Words .............................................................................. 95
Basic Words ............................................................................107
Function Words and Phrases ........................................... 115
Basic Words ............................................................................ 119

Basic Words ............................................................................263
Basic Words ............................................................................275
Basic Words ............................................................................289
Basic Words ............................................................................303
Basic Words ............................................................................ 317
Unit 3
Unit 6

Basic Words ............................................................................131
Basic Words ............................................................................143
Basic Words ............................................................................155
Basic Words ............................................................................167
Basic Words ............................................................................179

Basic Words ............................................................................331
Basic Words ............................................................................345
Basic Words ............................................................................359
Basic Words ............................................................................373
Basic Words ............................................................................387
English Language Development Vocabulary ... 388A
How to
Use this Book
Visual Vocabulary ResourcesA New Classroom Resource
Purpose and Use
The Visual Vocabulary Resources book provides teachers using the Macmillan/McGraw-Hill California
Treasures reading program photo-word cards that visually introduce specific vocabulary from the
program. The photos are intended to preteach vocabulary to English learners and Approaching Level
students, as well as offer additional, meaningful language and concept support to these students.
The photo-word cards are designed to interrelate with the English Learners and Approaching Small
Groups lessons and the English Learner Resource lessons, all of which are designed to support the EL
and struggling reader population. The Visual Vocabulary Resources book is referenced specifically in
those lessons.
Key
Vocabulary Words
Unit
Vocab
2 Wee
ulary
k 2 Lit
tle
Red
Hen
In the first half of the book, the photo-word cards support three categories of vocabulary in the core
reading program:
1. Key Vocabulary These are the Key Words as introduced to the entire class in the Oral Vocabulary
Card selections or the core selection. Students of all levels of language acquisition are taught these
words: Beginning, Early Intermediate, Intermediate, and Early Advanced.
2. Function Words and Phrases These are idioms, adverbs, two-word verbs, and other words
and phrases of particular use to English learners. Function Words and Phrases are also drawn
from the core selection, but will not be taught to the whole group as part of the core lesson. Students of all levels of language acquisition are taught these words: Beginning, Early
Intermediate, Intermediate, and Early Advanced.
3. Basic Words These words are chosen from the Read Aloud Anthology, the core selection, or
the Kindergarten Literature Big Book. They have been chosen to fit a specific thematic category
that will help EL learners increase their depth of vocabulary. These words are not singled out for
instruction to the whole group. Only students at the Beginning and Early Intermediate levels of
language acquisition are taught these words.
Wor
d3
Wor
d4
pudding, cheese, cream,

fresh fruit, stew, nuts
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 1
Pam and Sam
A1VVR_
CA_
U2W
2_RD10
_key
.indd
Structure of Book
The Key Vocabulary and Function Words and Phrases sections both have two photos on each right-hand
page. Each photo represents one vocabulary word. The teacher script is located on the back of each
card directly behind its accompanying photo. The Basic Words section shows six photos per page,
followed by a teacher routine. The ELD Content Words section mimics this format with 4 to 6 words per
page.
Teacher Scripts
The lessons found on the Key Vocabulary, Function Words and Phrases, and ELD Vocabulary sections are
interactive in approach. They define the vocabulary words in English and Spanish, point out cognates
(where appropriate), and provide strategies to get students talking and using the new language as
much as possible; for example students:
chorally pronounce the word to focus on articulation

partner talk with structured sentence frames to use the word in oral speech
role-play to make the word come to life and use in everyday situations
connect the word to known words and phrases through sentence replacement activities
engage in movement activities to experience the words meaning
The techniques make instruction engaging and memorable for students. These low-risk ways to practice
speaking help students make connections and develop understanding as they acquire vocabulary.
onsib
ility
75
pudding
cheese
cream
2/25
fresh fruit
ROUTINE
The second half of the book supports the vocabulary presented in the English Language
Development component of the California Treasures reading program. The ELD Vocabulary
presented is selected from the weekly Skill-Based English Learners Practice Reader. In the place of
the Basic Words categories, there are Content Words drawn from ELD Content Big Book selections.
resp
stew
Function Words and Phrases
/08
nuts
make out of
Word 1
Unit 3 Week 3 Masks All Over the World
1. Display the card.

2. Dene each word in English, referring to the photograph.
Incorporate actions where appropriate.
3. Have children say the word three times.
4. Explain how these six words t into a group, or category. During
independent work time, have children write sentences for each word.
11
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (tc) Ingram Publishing/Alamy Images. (tr) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Ken Cavanagh.
(bl) Mitch Hrdlicka/Getty Images. (bm) Kevin Sanchez/Cole Group/Getty Images. (br) C Squared Studios/Getty Images.
Word 2
make up
part
ner
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
cheerful
Word 2
genuine
Unit 1 Week 1 Pam and Sam
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
cheerful
TEACHER TALK
Point to the Word 1 image on the opposite side.
1. One word in the selection is cheerful. Say it

with me: cheerful. When you are cheerful, you
are happy or glad. When you feel cheerful,
you smile.
2. En espaol, cheerful quiere decir alegre,
contento, feliz. Cuando uno est alegre, uno
sonre y se muestra animado.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows the
word cheerful. (Point to the boys in the
photo.) These boys are smiling. Do you think
they feel angry or cheerful?
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is genuine.

Say it with me: genuine. When something is
genuine, it is real, not fake. You can have a
belt made of genuine leather. You can have
genuine feelings of love for someone.
2. En espaol, genuine quiere decir natural,
puro, autntico. Cuando algo es genuino,
es de verdad, no es falso. Uno puede tener una
correa o cinturn hecho de cuero genuino.
Uno le puede tener afecto genuino a alguien.
3. Genuine in English and genuino in Spanish are
cognates. They sound almost the same and
mean the same thing in both languages.
word genuine. (Point to the woman in the
photo.) See how this mother kisses the baby.
She has genuine feelings of love for this baby.
2
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Bananastock/PunchStock. (b) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
MOVEMENT
4. How do you look when you feel cheerful?
What do you do? Lets all pretend to be
cheerful together.
5. Ill describe a situation and you respond
by looking cheerful and saying the word
cheerful or looking unhappy and saying
not cheerful. Here we go: You got a 100 on
your math test (cheerful). Your forgot your
lunch (not cheerful). (Continue with similar
situations.)
6. Now lets say cheerful together three more
times: cheerful, cheerful, cheerful.
Word 2
genuine
PARTNER TALK
5. For whom do you have a genuine feeling of
love? Tell your partner about that person.
(I feel genuine love for my mom. She is nice to
me. She hugs me all the time.)
6. Work with your partner to use the word
genuine in a sentence. Use the sentence
frame: The boy feels genuine
.
7. Now lets say genuine together three more
times: genuine, genuine, genuine.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
interest
MacMillan McGraw-Hill photo credits:

(t) Photodisc/B2M Productions/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/Manchan/PunchStock.
Word 4
prefer
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
interest
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is interest. Say

it with me: interest. An interest is something
you enjoy doing or you want to know more
about. When you have an interest in
something, you pay attention because you
think its interesting.
2. En espaol, interest quiere decir curiosidad,
la atencin o inclinacin que se tiene por algo,
inters. Si algo te provoca inters, disfrutas
hacerlo o te da curiosidad por aprender ms.
Cuando sientes inters por algo, le prestas
atencin.
3. Interest in English and inters in Spanish are
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture that demonstrates
the word interest. (Point to the man and
boy in the photo.) This man is showing a
book to the little boy. They both seem to
have an interest in the book! The man has a
magnifying glass so the boy can see better. If
the boy did not have an interest in the book,
he might look bored.
5. What types of activities do you have an
interest in? Tell your partner. (I have an
interest in soccer. I also have an interest in
raising chickens.)
6. Think of three different interests your partner
might have. For each one, ask your partner:
Do you have an interest in
?
Why or why not?
7. Now lets say interest together three more
times: interest, interest, interest.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is prefer. Say it

with me: prefer. When you prefer something,
you like it more than something else. If
someone offered me an apple or a grapefruit,
I would choose the apple. I prefer apples. I
like them more than I like grapefruit.
2. En espaol, to prefer quiere decir preferir,
escoger una cosa entre varias opciones. Si
alguien me ofreciera una manzana o una
naranja, yo escogera la manzana. Preero la
manzana.
3. To prefer in English and preferir in Spanish are
the word prefer. (Point to the melon and the
pineapple in the photo.) This boys mom is
holding a melon in one hand and a pineapple
in the other. It looks like shes asking her son,
Which do you prefer?
prefer
PARTNER TALK
5. Which fruit do you think the boy prefers?
Why? Share your ideas with a partner.
(I think the boy prefers the melon because it is
sweeter.)
6. Look at the fruits in the photo. Work with
your partner to say which fruit you prefer. Use
the sentence frame: I prefer
.
7. Now lets say prefer together three more
times: prefer, prefer, prefer.
4
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/Manchan/PunchStock. (b) Photodisc/B2M Productions/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
unique
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
unique
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is unique. Say it

with me: unique. When something is unique,
it is the only one of its kind. It is special.
2. En espaol, unique quiere decir singular,
extraordinario, sin igual, nico. Cuando se
dice que algo es nico, no hay ms de su tipo
o clase. Es algo especial.
3. Unique in English and nico in Spanish are
the word unique. (Point to the dog in the
photo.) This dog is wearing a ribbon that says
First Place. This must be a special dog. The
people who gave him rst place thought he
was unique. He was not like the other dogs in
the contest.
6
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
5. Why do you think this dog might be unique?
What did he do for the judges? Share your
ideas with your partner. (This dog is unique
because he can dance on his hind legs. This
dog is unique because his coat is so shiny.)
6. What makes you unique? Tell your partner.
Use the sentence frame: I am unique because
.
7. Now lets say unique together three more
times: unique, unique, unique.
Word 1
creep past
Word 2
scamper across
Word 1
creep past
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use creep past to describe how

someone or something moves when passing
by slowly and quietly. Say it with me: creep
past. Creep past means to slowly move or
sneak by quietly. A cat might creep past a
sleeping dog so that the dog will not wake up.
2. En espaol, to creep past quiere decir
moverse o pasar al lado de algo lentamente,
sin hacer mucho ruido. Un gato puede pasar
lentamente por el lado de un perro para no
despertarlo.
3. This picture shows the phrase creep past. It
shows a trafc jam. There are so many cars on
the road that they can only move slowly, or
creep past each other.
4. I am going to say some sentences. Repeat the

sentences after me.
I will creep past you.
You will creep past me.
Who will creep past us?
Well see!
5. I am going to describe actions. If the actions
describe the phrase creep past, raise your
hand and say the phrase creep past. If not,
dont do anything.
The clown jumps out of the car.
A mouse sneaks by a sleeping cat.
The baby moves slowly on its hands and knees.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: creep
past, creep past, creep past.
Word 2
scamper across
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use scamper across to describe

a quick kind of movement. Say it with me:
scamper across. Scamper across means to run
or move quickly from one place to another. If
you want to get from one side of the street to
the other quickly, you can scamper across the
street.
2. En espaol, to scamper across quiere
decir moverse rpidamente de un lugar
a otro, corretear. Si quieres cruzar la
calle rpidamente, puedes cruzar la calle
correteando.
3. This picture shows the words scamper across.
The wolf is moving quickly over the snow. It
scampers across the snow.
4. I am going to name some places. If you can

scamper across them, say scamper across, if
not, say nothing.
a high rocky mountain
a at grassy meadow
the school yard
5. I am going to say some words that describe
actions. If they describe what it is like when
something scampers across, say yes. If they
do not, say no.
moves quickly
creeps past
runs fast
lays down
hops along
6. Repeat the words three times with me:
scamper across, scamper across, scamper,
across.
8
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) 1997 IMS Communications LTD/Capstone Design. All Rights Reserved./FlatEarth Images. (b) Creatas Images/PunchStock.
Word 3
crouch in fear
Word 4
watch in amazement
Word 3
crouch in fear
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use crouch in fear to describe

what we might do if we are afraid. Say it
with me: crouch in fear. Crouch in fear means
bend down or hide from something scary.
Some people crouch in fear when they watch
a scary movie.
2. En espaol, to crouch in fear quiere decir
encogerse de miedo. Algunas personas se
encogen de miedo cuando ven una pelcula
de terror.
3. This picture shows the phrase crouch in
fear. It shows children starting to hide and
cover themselves under the blanket because
they are watching something scary on the
television. They are all crouching in fear.
4. I am going to name an event. If it is

something that might cause you to crouch in
fear, say crouch in fear. If not, say nothing.
A lion walks past you.
A kitten walks past you.
A tornado comes toward the house.
The sun shines on your house.
5. Now I am going to say some sentence starters.
Repeat the sentence starters and complete
each one with the words crouch in fear.
When I hear a strange noise, I
.
When I watch a scary movie, I
.
When I see a dangerous animal, I
.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me:
crouch in fear, crouch in fear, crouch in fear.
Word 4
watch in amazement
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use watch in amazement to

describe how we look at some things. Say
it with me: watch in amazement. Watch in
amazement means to look at something
with wonder, surprise, or astonishment. At
the circus, people watch in amazement as the
man swings on the trapeze.
2. En espaol, to watch in amazement quiere
decir mirar algo con asombro o sorpresa.
En el circo, las personas miran con asombro
al trapecista mientras vuela por el aire.
3. This picture demonstrates the words watch
in amazement. These people are watching
something up high that is amazing or
astonishing. They are watching in amazement.
What might they be watching in amazement?
(Examples include: an airplane show, a
spaceship, a hot air balloon festival)
4. I am going to name some events. If people

would watch the event in amazement say,
watch in amazement. If not, say nothing.
a man walking across a tightrope
a boy juggling 10 balls at once
a woman pushing a baby carriage
a reworks show in the sky
5. I am going to say some words that describe
what people look like. If the words describe
what people might look like when they watch
in amazement, say yes. If not, say no.
eyes wide
mouths open
eyes closed
big smile
head down
watch in amazement, watch in amazement,
watch in amazement.
10
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Image100/PictureQuest.
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 1
Pam and Sam
pudding, cheese, cream,

fresh fruit, stew, nuts
pudding
cheese
cream
fresh fruit
stew
nuts
ROUTINE
11
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (tc) Ingram Publishing/Alamy Images. (tr) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Ken Cavanagh.
(bl) Mitch Hrdlicka/Getty Images. (bm) Kevin Sanchez/Cole Group/Getty Images. (br) C Squared Studios/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
energy
Unit 1 Week 2 I Can, Too!
Word 2
exhausted
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
energy
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is energy. Say it

with me: energy. If you have energy, you can
play for a long time and not get tired. When
you have energy, you arent tired.
2. En espaol, energy quiere decir nimo,
fuerza, poder, energa.Si t tienes energa,
puedes jugar por horas sin cansarte. Cuando
tienes energa no ests cansado.
3. Energy in English and energa in Spanish are
the word energy. (Point to the group of
children.) These children have lots of energy.
Look at how they run around on the beach.
When they run out of energy, they will want
a nap.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is exhausted.

Say it with me: exhausted. If you are
exhausted you are really tired. When you are
exhausted, you want to rest. Do you have a lot
of energy or are you exhausted?
2. En espaol, exhausted quiere decir estar muy
cansado, agotado, sin energa o sin fuerzas.Si
uno est agotado, probablemente quiere
descansar.
the word exhausted. (Point to girl and puppy
sleeping.) This girl is sleeping with the puppy
in her arms. Do you think she is exhausted?
14
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Bananastock/PunchStock. (b) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
5. What do you do when you have a lot of
energy? Tell your partner. (I play tag. I run
around with my dog.)
6. Tell your partner how much energy you have
right now. Use the sentence frame: Right now,
I have
energy.
7. Now lets say energy together three more
times: energy, energy, energy.
Word 2
exhausted
MOVEMENT
4. Lets all pretend that were exhausted. Lets
yawn and stretch our arms. Lets rub our eyes
and go to sleep.
5. Lets pretend that we had a long day at
school, and now were exhausted. Walk into
your house and op onto the couch. Give a
big, tired yawn.
6. Now lets say exhausted together three more
times: exhausted, exhausted, exhausted.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
stretch
Word 4
movements
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
stretch
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is stretch. Say

it with me: stretch. When you stretch, you
extend your arms and legs. When you stretch,
you get more exible.
2. En espaol, to stretch quiere decir estirar,
alargar, extender. Cuando uno se estira,
extiende sus brazos y piernas. Al estirarse su
cuerpo se vuelve ms exible.
the word stretch. (Point to the kids in the
photo.) These children are stretching. Look at
their arms and legs.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets all get up and stretch. Lets reach up to
the sky. Now lets stand on our toes. Reach
from side to side.
5. Pretend you just woke up. Get out of bed and
stretch your body. Lets get the kinks out.
Touch the oor. Now straighten up. Make an
x with your body.
6. Now lets say stretch together three more
times: stretch, stretch, stretch.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is movements.

Say it with me: movements. Movement means
a change in position. Running, stretching,
and even coloring with a crayon are all
movements.
2. En espaol, movements quiere decir la
actividad de un cuerpo, o el cambio de
posicin de algo o alguien, movimientos.Una
cosa hace un movimiento cuando cambia de
lugar o posicin. Cuando corres, te estiras o
coloreas ests haciendo movimientos.
3. Movements in English and movimientos in
Spanish are cognates. They sound almost
the same and mean the same thing in both
languages.
the word movements. (Point to the zebra
in the photo.) See how the zebra runs. It is
making movements with its body.
movements
MOVEMENT
5. Lets all get up and make movements. Jump
up and down. Make circles with your arms.
Touch your ear to your shoulder.
6. Pretend you are a sh swimming in the water.
Show me what movements you make under
water.
7. Now lets say movements together three more
times: movements, movements, movements.
16
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) The Image Bank/Darren Robb/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc Green/Anup Shah/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
express
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
express
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is express. Say

it with me: express. When you express your
feelings, you show or tell about your feelings.
How would you express feelings of happiness?
Show me.
2. En espaol, to express quiere decir mostrar o
decir lo que sientes, expresar. Cuando expresas
tus sentimientos, los ests mostrando.
3. To express in English and expresar in Spanish
are cognates. They sound almost the same
and mean the same thing in both languages.
the word express. (Point to the group of boys.)
These boys like to express their feelings. Look
at how they hug each other. This is how they
express their friendship.
18
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/Steve Baccon/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. How can you express sadness? Tell your
partner, and show your partner too. (Examples
Include: I pout. I cry. I hug my mom.)
express in a sentence. Tell your partner when
you would express surprise. Use the sentence
frame: I would express surprise
when
.
7. Now lets say express together three more
times: express, express, express.
Word 1
high
Word 2
far
Word 1
high
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use high to describe a great

distance above us. Say it with me: high. High
means far up, or way above the ground.
Airplanes y high in the sky.
2. En espaol, high quiere decir alto, elevado, a
gran altura del suelo. Los aviones vuelan alto
por el cielo.
3. This picture demonstrates the word high. The
giraffe has a long neck, so it can reach high
above the ground. It can eat leaves that are
high up in a tree.
4. I am going to name some things. If they are

high, say high. If not, say not high.
clouds in the sky
a worm on the ground
the top of a mountain
an ant in the grass
5. I am going to say some sentences. Repeat
each sentence. Replace the words way up
with the word high.
The bird ew way up into the sky.
I can see the moon way up above Earth.
We climbed way up to the mountaintop.
The reghter climbed way up on the ladder.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: high,
high, high.
Word 2
far
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use far to describe a great

distance away. Say it with me: far. If your
school is a long distance from your house, it is
far from your house.
2. En espaol, far quiere decir lejos, a gran
distancia. Si la escuela queda a gran distancia
de tu casa, queda lejos de tu casa.
3. This picture shows the word far. The girl is
getting ready to throw the ball as far as she
can. She wants the ball to go a great distance
away. She wants it to travel far.
4. I am going to name pairs of places or things.

Name the one that is far in each pair.
my desk or the principals ofce
this school or the stars in the sky
an inch from where your are or a mile from
where you are
the sun or the post ofce
each sentence. Replace the words a long way
with the word far.
I live a long way from my grandmother.
I went on a vacation a long way from home.
The sun is a long way from Earth.
I can throw a ball a long way.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: far,
far, far.
20
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Anup Shah/Getty Images. (b) The McGraw-Hill Companies Inc./Gerald Wofford photographer.
Word 3
long (time)
Word 4
fast
Word 3
long (time)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can use long to describe how

much time something might take to do. Say it
with me: long. Long can mean using up a lot
of time. If you read slowly, it will take a long
time to nish reading a book.
2. En espaol, long time quiere decir mucho
tiempo. Si lees lentamente, te toma mucho
tiempo terminar un libro.
3. This picture shows the word long. These
people are hiking up a big mountain. It will
take a long time for them to get where they
are going.
4. I am going to name some activities. If the

activity takes a long time to complete, say the
word long. If it does not take a long time, say
nothing.
build a house
turn on a light
drive across the country
wave hello
become a doctor
5. Now I am going to ask questions. Answer
yes or no.
Does it take a long time to throw a ball?
Does it take a long time to learn how to y
a plane?
Does it take a long time to grow up?
Does it take a long time to shut a door?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: long,
long, long.
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use fast to describe speed. Say

it with me: fast. Fast means quick. You run
fast to win a race.
2. En espaol, fast quiere decir rpido, veloz.
Si quieres ganar una carrera, corres rpido.
3. This picture shows the word fast. This
ambulance is taking a person who is ill to
the hospital. It moves fast to get the person
there quickly.
4. Lets walk around the room in a line at a

regular speed. Then lets walk fast. Follow me.
5. Lets take turns acting out things we can do
fast. Lets pretend we are running fast, talking
fast, and eating fast.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: fast,
fast, fast.
22
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) PhotoAlto Agency RF Collections/ZenShui/Laurence Mouton/Getty Images. (b) Steve Allen/Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Word 4
fast
jump, skip, kick,

stop, swing, throw
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 2
I Can, Too!
jump
skip
kick
stop
swing
throw
ROUTINE
4. Explain how there six words t into a group, or category. During
23
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Jean-Michel CORNET/age fotostock. (tc) Paul Burns/Getty Images. (tr) Creatas/Punchstock/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.
(bl) Photodisc/SW Productions/Getty Images. (bm) BananaStock/Alamy Images. (br) Charles Smith/Corbis.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
adult
Unit 1 Week 3 How You Grew
Word 2
change
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
adult
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is adult. Say it with

me: adult. If you are an adult, you are not a
child anymore. You become an adult when
you grow up.
2. En espaol, adult quiere decir adulto.
Una persona adulta ya no es un nio. Uno
se vuelve un adulto cuando ha terminado
de crecer.
3. Adult in English and adulto in Spanish are
the word adult. (Point to the adult gorilla with
her baby.) This gorilla is an adult. The baby
is not an adult. How are they different? The
gorilla is big. The baby is little.)
PARTNER TALK
5. Think of some adults that you know. Tell
your partner who they are. (Examples include:
mom, dad, teacher)
6. Work with your partner to use the word adult
in a sentence. Tell your partner how old you
will be when youre an adult. Use the sentence
frame: When Im
years old, I
will be an adult.
7. Now lets say adult together three more times:
adult, adult, adult.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is change. Say

it with me: change. To change means to
become different. What are some ways that
you might change as you grow?
2. En espaol, to change quiere decir cambiar,
transformar, hacer algo diferente a como era
antes. Si uno cambia, no es igual a como era
antes. Cmo cambiars al crecer?
the word change. (Point to the group of
children.) These children are of different ages.
Look at the younger girl on the left here. How
will she change?
change
PARTNER TALK
4. What were you like as a baby? How have you
changed since then? Tell your partner. (I was
small, but now Im bigger. I cried a lot, but
now I dont. I couldnt walk, but now I can.)
change in a sentence. Tell your partner what
you think will change about you within ve
years. Use the sentence frame: In ve years,
my
will change.
6. Now lets say change together three more
times: change, change, change.
26
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Paul Souders/The Image Bank/Getty Images. (b) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
imitate
Word 4
learn
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
imitate
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is imitate. Say it

with me: imitate. When you imitate someone,
you do exactly what they do.
2. En espaol, to imitate quiere decir copiar
algo o repetir las acciones de una persona,
imitar. Cuando imitas a alguien, haces lo que
esa persona hara.
3. To imitate in English and imitar in Spanish are
the word imitate. (Point to the girl in the
photo.) This girl wants to learn how to knead
dough. Thats why she will imitate what the
adult is doing. She will do the same thing as
the adult.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is learn. Say it

with me: learn. When someone teaches you
something, you learn it. You can learn by
watching, doing, or listening.
2. En espaol, to learn quiere decir aprender
o lograr entender algo. Cuando alguien
te ensea algo, t lo aprendes. Se aprende
observando, haciendo y escuchando.
the word learn. Say it with me: learn. The
girl that is sitting wants to learn how to use
the computer. She had not used one before.
See the girl pointing at the computer? She is
teaching her how to use it.
28
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Mark Karrass/Corbis. (b) Blend Images/Jose Luis Pelaez Inc/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
5. Pretend your partner is your reection in the
mirror. Imitate what your partner does.
6. Think about an animal. Think of its
movements and its sounds. Show the class
how you imitate it. We will guess what animal
you are imitating.
7. Now lets say imitate together three more
times: imitate, imitate, imitate.
Word 4
learn
PARTNER TALK
4. If you could learn to play a musical
instrument, what would it be? Tell your
partner. (I would like to learn to play the
ute. I would like to learn to play the guitar.)
5. What do you like to learn? Use the sentence
frame: I like to learn how to
.
6. Now lets say learn together three more times:
learn, learn, learn.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
FPO
1.1.3_key_practice.jpg
practice
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
practice
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is practice.

Say it with me: practice. When you practice
something you do it over and over again.
You practice something to get better at it.
You have to practice a lot to do something
very well.
2. En espaol, to practice quiere decir hacer
algo muchas veces para mejorar, practicar.
Cuando practicas algo, lo haces una y otra
vez. Tienes que practicar mucho para poder
hacerlo bien.
3. To practice in English and practicar in Spanish
the word practice. (Point to the boy playing
basketball.) This boy practices playing
basketball. If he practices every day, soon he
will be a better basketball player.
30
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Purestock/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
5. What are some things you practice? Tell your
partner. (math, writing, piano)
6. Pretend we are going to play soccer. First, we
need to practice. Where are some good places
to practice soccer? Use the sentence frame:
is a good place to practice
playing soccer.
7. Now lets say practice together three more
times: practice, practice, practice.
Word 1
taller than
Unit 1 Week 3 How You Grow
Word 2
shorter than
Word 1
taller than
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use taller than to compare

height. Say it with me: taller than. Taller than
means one thing is higher than another. A
giraffe is taller than a lion.
2. En espaol, taller than quiere decir ms alto
que otra cosa. Una jirafa es ms alta que
un len.
3. This picture shows the words taller than. It
shows the coach and his team. The coach is
taller than the children on the team. That is
why he crouches down for the picture.
4. I am going to name and point to different

pairs of people or objects. Use the sentence
frame to compare each item in the pair.
Say:
is taller than
.
(Point to various pairs of children or items
in the class, such as the desk and the waste
basket.)
5. Now I am going to ask questions. Say yes
or no to answer each question.
Is a mouse taller than an ant?
Is our school building taller than a car?
Is a ower taller than a tree?
Are you taller than me?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: taller
than, taller than, taller than.
TEACHER TALK
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use shorter than to compare

height. Say it with me: shorter than. Shorter
than means one thing is lower than
another. A goat is shorter than a giraffe.
2. En espaol, shorter than decir ms bajo
que otra cosa. Un chivo es ms bajo que
una jirafa.
3. This picture shows the words shorter than.
It shows buildings that are different heights.
(Point to the pairs of buildings as you describe
them.) The two buildings in the middle are
shorter than the two buildings at the end.
4. I am going to name and point to different

pairs of people or objects. Use the sentence
frame to compare each item in the pair.
Say:
is shorter than
.
(Point to various pairs of children or items
in the class, such as the desk and the waste
basket.)
5. Now I am going to ask questions. Say yes
or no to answer each question.
Is a dog shorter than a hamster?
Is a slipper shorter than a boot?
Is a ower shorter than a tree?
Are you shorter than your desk?
shorter than, shorter than, shorter than.
32
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) JupiterImages/ BananaStock/Alamy Images. (b) Henri Conodul/Iconotec.com.
Word 2
shorter than
Word 3
a year ago
Unit 1 Week 3 How You Grow
Word 4
now
Word 3
a year ago
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use a year ago to tell about a

time that has passed. Say it with me: a year
ago. A year ago means 12 months in the
past. A year ago, most children in our class
were in kindergarten.
2. En espaol, a year ago quiere decir hace un
ao, hace 12 meses. Hace un ao, muchos de
nuestros compaeros estaban en kinder.
3. This picture shows the phrase a year ago.
It shows children at a birthday party. The
birthday boy in this picture is six years old. A
year ago, he was ve years old.
4. Tell your partner how old you were a year

ago. Use the sentence frame: A year ago, I
was
.
5. Now talk with your partner about what you
did not know how to do a year ago. (Examples
include: A year ago, I could not read. A year
ago, I could not ride a bike.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: a year
ago, a year ago, a year ago.
TEACHER TALK
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use now to tell when. Say it

with me: now. Now means at this time. You
are all listening to me now.
2. En espaol, now quiere decir ahora,
actualmente. Ustedes me escuchan ahora.
3. This picture shows the word now. These
children are looking at the globe right now.
Later they may read a story. But now they are
looking at the globe with the teacher.
4. I am going to name two activities at a time.

Say the activity I am doing now. (Act out one
activity as you say each pair.)
Now I clap my hands or touch my toes.
Now I look up or look down.
Now I sit or stand.
Now I walk or run.
5. I am going to ask you to do some activities.
Keep doing each activity until I say, Now
[another activity]. (Include these activities.)
clap your hands
jump
tap your desk
walk around the room
6. Repeat the word three times with me: now,
now, now.
34
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Andersen Ross/Blend Images/Getty Images. (b) Creatas/PunchStock.
Word 4
now
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 3
How You Grew
milk, carrot, bran,

apple, sandwich, beans
milk
carrot
bran
apple
sandwich
beans
ROUTINE
35
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (tc) D. Hurst/Alamy Images. (tr) ImageSource/age fotostock.
(bl) PhotoAlto/PunchStock. (bm) C Squared Studios/Getty Images. (br) Barry Gregg/Corbis.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
adorable
Unit 1 Week 4 Flip
Word 2
dear
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
adorable
Unit 1 Week 4 Flip
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is adorable. Say it

with me: adorable. Adorable means very cute
and lovable. People often think babies and
little animals are adorable.
2. En espaol, adorable quiere decir muy lindo,
precioso. Las personas creen que los bebs y
los animalitos chiquitos son muy lindos.
word adorable. (Point to the puppy in the
photo.) See how little and cute this puppy is.
It looks so soft and warm. Wouldnt you like
to pet this adorable puppy?
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk to your partner about what makes the
puppy in the picture adorable. (He has such
a cute little nose. His ears are so oppy. He
would be fun to play with.)
5. Work with your partner to tell about people,
animals, and things you think are adorable.
Tell why they are adorable. Use the sentence
frame: I think
is adorable
because
.
6. Now lets say adorable together three more
times: adorable, adorable, adorable.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is dear. Say it

with me: dear. Dear means loved very much.
When something is dear to us, we take very
good care of it. Our family and friends are
dear to us. Pets can be dear to us. Even our
favorite things can be dear to us.
2. En espaol, dear quiere decir querido,
apreciado. Cuando sentimos que una cosa
es muy querida, la cuidamos mucho. Nuestra
familia y nuestros amigos son muy queridos.
Nuestras mascotas tambin pueden ser
queridas. Hasta nuestras cosas preferidas son
queridas.
word dear. (Point to the puppy in the photo.)
The puppy is very dear to the girl. See how the
girl looks at the puppy. We can tell she loves
him. See how shiny he is. He also has a collar.
We can tell the girl takes very good care of
her puppy because he is dear to her.
dear
PARTNER TALK
4. Draw a picture of someone or something
that is dear to you. Share your drawing with
a partner and tell why the person or thing
is dear.
5. We keep things that are dear to us in safe
places. For example, people keep special
jewelry in jewelry boxes. Tell your partner
other places that people keep things that are
dear to them. (Examples include: a special box,
photo albums, a safe)
6. Now lets say dear together three more times:
dear, dear, dear.
38
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) G.K. & Vikki Hart/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc/Barbara Peacock/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
needs
Unit 1 Week 4 Flip
Word 4
sensible
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
needs
Unit 1 Week 4 Flip
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is needs. Say it

with me: needs. Needs are things a person or
thing must have. Soil, air, and water are needs
that plants have. Plants could not stay alive
without these things.
2. En espaol, needs quiere decir las cosas
que una persona o cosa tiene que tener para
sobrevivir, necesidades. Las necesidades de
una planta son el aire, la tierra y agua. Sin
estas cosas, las plantas no podran vivir.
the word needs. We see the family meeting
two of their needs. They are eating and
drinking. Food and drink are needs of
every person.
MOVEMENT
4. I am going to show you how we meet one of
our needs. Do the action with me. (Make a
pillow with your hands and pretend to sleep
on it.) What need am I meeting? (need for
sleep) I will show how I meet another need.
(Run in place.) What need am I meeting?
(need to move or exercise)
5. Think of some of your needs. Take turns with
your partner acting out how you meet your
needs. Your partner will guess the needs you
act out.
6. Now lets say needs together three more
times: needs, needs, needs.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is sensible. Say

it with me: sensible. When you are sensible
you act in a way that is wise and makes sense.
Things that are not sensible are silly. It is
sensible to wear a coat in the snow. It would
not be sensible to wear a bathing suit in
the snow.
2. En espaol, sensible quiere decir que muestra
sabidura y calma en su forma de actuar,
sensato. Si uno o algo no es sensato es
necio o tonto. Es sensato ponerse un saco en
la nieve. No es sensato salir a la nieve en un
vestido de bao.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows
someone acting in a sensible way. (Point to
the girl in the picture.) The girl in this picture
was playing hard on a hot summer day. Now,
she has stopped playing. She is taking a drink.
It is sensible to drink after we play hard in
the heat.
sensible
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner sensible things to wear in
different kinds of weather. Use the sentence
frame: It is sensible to wear
in
weather.
5. We help ourselves to stay safe by being
sensible. It is sensible to wear seatbelts. Tell
your partner other sensible things you do to
stay safe. (It is sensible to wear sunblock. It is
sensible to eat healthy foods.)
6. Now lets say sensible together three more
times: sensible, sensible, sensible.
40
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) AsiaPix/Asia Images Group/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/Tanya Constantine/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Unit 1 Week 4 Flip
Word 5
train
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
train
Unit 1 Week 4 Flip
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is train. Say it with

me: train. To train means to teach a person
or animal to do something. One person can
train another to do a job. A person can train
an animal to do tricks.
2. En espaol, to train quiere decir ensearle a
una persona o a un animal cmo hacer algo,
entrenar. Una persona puede entrenar a
otra a hacer un trabajo. Una persona puede
entrenar a un animal a que haga trucos.
someone training a pet. The girl wants to
train her dog to do a trick. She shows him
how to put his paw up in the air. He copies
her. She tells him he is a good dog so he will
do it again.
42
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. You know how to do many things. You could
train a younger child to do things you know
how to do. Tell your partner some things you
could train someone to do. (ride a bike, draw
a cat)
5. Think of a kind of pet. Draw a picture of a
trick that you think it would be fun to train
that kind of pet to do. Show your picture
to your partner. Tell about it. Use the word
train. (It would be fun to train a bird to say,
Hello.)
6. Now lets say train together three more times:
train, train, train.
Word 1
come back
Unit 1 Week 4 Flip
Word 2
go away
Word 1
come back
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use come back to describe what

someone does when they return. Say it with
me: come back. Come back means return to
the place you started from. At the end of the
day you come back home.
2. En espaol, to come back quiere decir
regresar a un lugar. Al nal del da,
regresamos a casa.
3. This picture shows the words come back. It
shows a Ferris wheel. On this ride, each car
goes all the way around. Then it comes back
to the bottom where it started out.
4. I am going to describe where you start from

and where you go. Then say and complete the
sentence: Then I come back
. For
example, Ill say, You leave home and go to
school. You say, Then I come back home.
You leave the classroom and go to lunch.
You leave your seat and walk to the front of
the room.
5. Now I am going to say some words. If they
mean the same as come back, say come
back. If not, say nothing.
stay away
return
go to where you started
spin around
6. Repeat the words three times with me: come
back, come back, come back.
Word 2
go away
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL REPSONSE
1. In English, we use go away to describe what

someone does when they leave. Say it with
me: go away. Go away means to leave and
go to another place. Everyday we go away
from home to come to school.
2. En espaol, to go away decir salir de un lugar
para irse a otro. Cada da salimos de casa
para irnos a la escuela.
3. This picture shows the words go away.
It shows children getting on a school bus.
When the bus moves, they go away from
the bus stop.
4. I am going to describe where you start from

and where you go. Then say and complete
the sentence: I go away from
. For
example, Ill say, You start from home and go
to school. You say, I go away from home.
You start from the classroom and go to lunch.
You start from your seat and go to the front of
the room.
5. Now I am going to say some words. If they
mean the same as go away, say go away.
If not, say nothing.
move away
return
leave
stay
6. Repeat the words three times with me: go
away, go away, go away.
44
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) David R. Frazier/Photo Researchers, Inc.. (b) SW Productions/Getty Images.
Word 3
sit down
Word 4
stand up
Unit 1 Week 4 Flip
Word 3
sit down
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use sit down to tell about a

move we might make. Say it with me: sit
down. Sit down means to take a seat, get
into a seated position. We sit down on our
chairs in the classroom.
2. En espaol, to sit down quiere decir
sentarse. Nos sentamos en las sillas
del saln.
3. This picture shows the words sit down.
It shows children sitting down in a circle
listening to the teacher read a book.
4. Tell your partner some things you do when

you sit down in the classroom. Use the
sentence: I sit down when I
.
(Examples include, read, write, draw, listen to
the teacher)
5. Now talk with your partner about places
where you can sit down to read a book. Use
the sentence: I can sit down on a
.
(Examples include: chair, couch, bench, bed)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: sit
down, sit down, sit down.
Word 4
stand up
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use stand up to tell about a

move we might make. Say it with me: stand
up. Stand up means to get up on your feet.
When we go to lunch, we stand up rst and
then get in a line.
2. En espaol, to stand up quiere decir ponerse
de pie. A la hora del almuerzo, nos ponemos
de pie y nos ponemos en la.
3. This picture shows the words stand up. These
children are standing up as they pledge
allegiance to the ag.
4. Repeat this chant after me.

Stand up when the parade comes by.
Stand up and watch the birds y.
Stand up to reach a book up high.
Stand up to see stars in the sky.
5. I am going to ask you questions. Answer each
by saying yes or no.
Can you stand up while you sit down?
Can you stand up while you sing?
Can you stand up while you kneel?
Can you stand up while you read?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: stand
up, stand up, stand up.
46
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Corbis. (b) Jill Braaten/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 4
Flip
lamb, monkey, seal,

turtle, whale, porpoise
lamb
monkey
seal
turtle
whale
porpoise
ROUTINE
47
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Getty Images. (tc) Creatas Images/PunchStock. (tr) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
(bl) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images. (bm) Creatas/PunchStock. (br) Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
admire
Unit 1 Week 5 Soccer
Word 2
challenging
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
admire
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is admire. Say

it with me: admire. To admire means to
respect. When we admire a person, we think
the person is special because of what he or
she is or does. You might admire someone
who is very kind. You might admire someone
who can play the piano well.
2. En espaol, to admire quiere decir respetar,
pensar que alguien es especial por lo que
hace, admirar. Tal vez admiras a alguien que
es muy amable. Tal vez admiras a alguien
porque toca el piano muy bien.
3. To admire in English and admirar in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is challenging.

Say it with me: challenging. Challenging
means hard to do. Something challenging
takes a lot of effort to do. Sometimes we have
to work hard to do something challenging,
such as riding a bike up a hill. Sometimes
we have to think hard to do a something
challenging, such as solving a puzzle.
2. En espaol, challenging quiere decir difcil
de hacer, retador. Algo retador requiere
de mucho esfuerzo para hacer. A veces
tenemos que esforzarnos mucho para lograr
algo retador, como manejar la bicicleta
subiendo una colina. A veces tenemos que
pensar mucho para hacer algo retador, como
terminar un rompecabezas.
something challenging. The people in the
photo are doing something challenging. They
are doing a handstand. They are standing on
their hands instead of their feet.
50
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/SW Productions/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows what
it is like to admire. The family in the photo
looks at the father. They look at him with love
and respect. We can tell that they think he is
special. They admire him.
5. Take turns telling your partner people you
admire. Explain why you admire each person
you name.
6. Make a card for someone you admire. On the
front, show why you admire the person. Inside
write a message, I admire you. (Write the
message on the board.)
7. Now lets say admire together three more
times: admire, admire, admire.
Word 2
challenging
MOVEMENT
4. I am going to name some things to do. If I say
something challenging to do, stand up and
say challenging. If I say something that is not
challenging, sit down and say nothing. Lets
begin: Read a hard book. Take a nap. Eat one
grape. Eat one hundred grapes. Figure out the
answer to a hard riddle. Climb a mountain.
Write your name.
5. I am going to do something challenging. Then
you will do it. (Do an action such as stand
on one foot and hop.) Who has something
challenging they would like us to try? Be
sure it is safe to do in the classroom. (Call on
several volunteers for the class to imitate.)
6. Now lets say challenging together three more
times: challenging, challenging, challenging.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
charity
Word 4
focus
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
charity
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is charity. Say

it with me: charity. Charity is helping people
who do not have things they need. For
example, giving coats to children who need
warm clothes is an act of charity.
2. En espaol, charity quiere decir ayuda a las
personas necesitadas, caridad. Donar sacos
a nios que no tienen ropa caliente para el
invierno es un acto de caridad.
3. Charity in English and caridad in Spanish are
word charity. We see two teens who are doing
an act of charity. They are serving food to
people who are hungry and do not have food.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is focus. Say it

with me: focus. To focus means to look hard
or pay close attention to something. When I
write something on the board, you all look at
it. You focus on what I am writing.
2. En espaol, to focus quiere decir mirar
jamente o concentrar la atencin en algo,
enfocar. Cuando escribo algo en el tablero,
ustedes lo miran. Ustedes se enfocan en lo que
estoy escribiendo.
it is like to focus. (Point to the leaf the boy is
holding.) The boy focuses on this leaf. He is
looking at it very closely. He is even using a
special tool to focus on the leaf. It is called a
magnifying glass. The tool makes things look
bigger. The tool helps him pay attention to
every little part of the leaf.
52
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner about an act of charity
you saw someone do. Tell why it was an act
of charity.
6. You and your partner will take turns naming
things a person needs to stay alive and
well. Your partner will tell an act of charity
someone could do to help a person who
needed that thing.
7. Now lets say charity together three more
times: charity, charity, charity.
Word 4
focus
MOVEMENT
4. We will play a game. I will tell you to focus
your eyes on something. You will turn around
and focus on it. Focus on the door. Focus on
your left foot. Focus on the board. (Say several
more commands with focus. Then call on
volunteers to take turns telling the class what
to focus on.)
5. The boy in the photo uses a magnifying
glass to focus on a leaf. Pretend you have
a magnifying glass. (Demonstrate curling
your ngers into a circle to hold a pretend
magnifying glass.) Find something in our room
to focus on with your pretend magnifying
glass. Then I will ask you to tell us what you
are focusing on.
6. Now lets say focus together three more times:
focus, focus, focus.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
offer
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
offer
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is offer. Say

it with me: offer. To offer means to give
something to someone. When we offer
something to someone, they may take it or
they may not. For example, a friend could
offer you a snack after school.
2. En espaol, to offer quiere decir dar algo a
alguien, ofrecer. Cuando le ofreces algo a
alguien, esa persona puede aceptarlo o puede
no aceptarlo. Por ejemplo, un amigo te puede
ofrecer algo de comer despus de clases.
3. To offer in English and ofrecer in Spanish are
the word offer. The girl offers a gift to her
grandmother. The grandmother smiles. She
reaches out to take what the girl offers her.
54
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. I will pretend to offer you some different
foods. Decide if you want each food. If you
do, reach out as if you will accept my offer.
If you do not want the food, put your hands
behind your back. (Name various items such as
a banana, a bowl of spinach, a pretzel, cereal
with ketchup on it.)
6. I will give you time to gather three things
from the classroom. Then you will offer each
thing to your partner. Say: I want to offer you
this
. If your partner wants the
item, he or she will take it and say: Thank you.
If the partner does not want the item, he or
she will not take it and say: No, thank you.
7. Now lets say offer together three more times:
offer, offer, offer.
Word 1
over there
Word 2
over (in a higher position)
Word 1
over there
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use over there to describe

where something is. Say it with me: over
there. Over there means in that place.
(Point to the classroom window as you say
the following sentence.) The window is over
there.
2. En espaol, over there quiere decir all,
en ese lugar. (Seale la ventana del saln
mientras lee la frase que sigue) La ventana
est all.
3. This picture shows the words over there.
Suppose you are standing by the door and are
asked, Where is the computer? You point to
the computer and say, It is over there.
4. Look back at the photo with your partner. Ask

each other questions about where different
items are in the picture. Answer the questions
by pointing and using the words over there.
5. Repeat the activity you just did, but this
time ask and answer questions about items
in our classroom. Remember to answer each
question with the words over there.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: over
there, over there, over there.
Word 2
over (in a higher position)
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we sometimes use over to describe

a position above. Say it with me: over. Over
can mean in a higher place or position.
The ceiling is over our heads.
2. En espaol, to be over quiere decir arriba,
encima. El techo est arriba de nuestras
cabezas.
3. This picture shows the word over. It shows the
clouds that are above the ocean. The white,
uffy clouds have formed over the water.
4. Lets put our hands over our heads. Now lets

put the right hand over the left hand. Now
lets switch and put the left hand over the
right hand.
5. (Provide children with several different
colored counters or blocks to practice over.)
Lets put the red block over the yellow block.
Now lets put the blue block over the red
block. (Continue with other instructions that
illustrate the concept.)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: over,
over, over.
56
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/PunchStock. (b) PhotoAlto Agency/Laurence Mouton/Jupiterimages.
Word 3
over (upside down)
Word 4
over (to be done with)
Word 3
over (upside down)
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we sometimes use over to describe

a different position. Say it with me: over. Over
can mean in an upside down position. If
we turn a cup over, the top is then on the
bottom. The cup is over, or upside down.
2. En espaol, to be over tambin quiere decir
volteado, al revs. Si volteamos una taza,
la parte de arriba est abajo. La taza est
al revs.
3. This picture shows the word over. It shows
children hanging upside down. They are
hanging over the bar.
4. Look at the picture again. Tell your partner

about a time when you or someone you know
hung upside down. Use the word over to
mean upside down.
5. Tell your partner how a glass, a pancake, and
a wagon turned upside down. Use the word
over in your sentences.
over, over.
Word 4
over (to be done with)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can also use the word over to

tell about the end of an event. Say it with
me: over. Over can mean to be done with or
nished. When a runner crosses the nish
line, the race is over.
2. En espaol, to be over tambin quiere
decir haberse terminado. Cuando un
corredor cruza la lnea de meta, la carrera ha
terminado.
3. This picture shows the word over. The art
project the girl was working on is nished.
She is hanging up her painting now that the
project is over.
4. I am going to say some words. If the word

means over as in The race is over, say
over. If not, say nothing. (Read these words:
done, begin, nished, start, stopped, ended.)
5. I am going to describe some events. If you
think I am describing an event that is over and
done with, clap and say, Its over! If not,
dont say anything.
The curtain comes down at the end of
the show.
The school day is nished at three oclock.
The race has begun.
The television show has come to an end.
over, over.
58
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/Katy McDonnell/Getty Images. (b) Ken Cavanagh/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 5
Soccer
soccer, tennis, baseball,

basketball, football, softball
soccer
tennis
baseball
basketball
football
softball
ROUTINE
independen work time, have children write sentences for each word.
59
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) BananaStock/Alamy Images. (tc) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (tr) Comstock/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Stone/Lawrence Migdale/Getty Images. (bm) Brand X Pictures/Getty Images. (br) Brand X Pictures/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
guide
Unit 2 Week 1 Animal Moms and Dads
Word 2
provide
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
guide
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is guide. Say it with

me: guide. To guide means to show or point
out. If you do not know how to get home
you can ask a police ofcer to guide you.
2. En espaol, to guide quiere decir mostrar el
camino, guiar. Si uno no sabe cmo llegar a
su casa, le puede preguntar a un polica que
lo gue.
3. To guide in English and guiar in Spanish are
word guide. (Point to the woman in the
photo.) See how this woman is pointing to the
dinosaur. She guides the children to look at
the skeleton. It looks like she is guiding them
to see the teeth.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is provide. Say

it with me: provide. To provide means to
give or supply something needed. The school
provides books we need to read. Our families
provide us with care and love.
2. En espaol, to provide quiere decir dar o aportar
algo que se necesita, proveer. El colegio nos
provee los libros que necesitamos para leer.
Nuestras familias nos proveen cario y amor.
3. To provide in English and proveer in Spanish
word provide. (Point to the art supplies in the
photo.) See the paints and brushes. The art
teacher provides them to the children so they
can paint their pictures.
62
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Bananastock/PunchStock. (b) Bananastock/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. Lets take turns guiding a classmate to your
desk. Choose a classmate, walk over to him or
her. Then guide your classmate back to
your desk.
6. Lets make a line. We can take turns leading
the line. The leader can guide the others in
line to march around the room.
7. Now lets say guide together three more
times: guide, guide, guide.
Word 2
provide
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner what you would provide for
a dog if you had a dog as a pet. (Examples
include: food, water, toys, a soft bed)
6. Think about all of the things your family
provides for you. Talk to your partner about
what they provide. (Examples include: a home,
food, clothes, love, fun)
7. Now lets say provide together three more
times: provide, provide, provide.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
protect
Word 4
separate
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
protect
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is protect. Say

it with me: protect. To protect means to
keep safe or to stop from getting hurt. When
you skate, you should wear pads to protect
you if you fall. In a car we wear a seat belt to
protect us.
2. En espaol, to protect quiere decir mantener
seguro o prevenir maltrato, proteger. Cuando
patinan se colocan rodilleras para proteger sus
rodillas si se caen. Cuando vamos en un carro,
nos ponemos nuestros cinturones de seguridad
para protegernos si hay un accidente.
3. To protect in English and proteger in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is separate.

Say it with me: separate. To separate means
to move apart. To open a jar you have to
separate the top from the jar. When we clap,
we separate our hands and then clap them
together.
2. En espaol, to separate quiere decir apartar,
separar, abrir el espacio entre una cosa y
otra. Para abrir un tarro tienes que separar la
tapa del tarro. Cuando aplaudimos, primero
separamos nuestras manos y luego unimos las
palmas para que suenen.
3. To separate in English and separar in Spanish
64
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (b) Comstock/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
word protect. (Point to the helmet in the
photo.) This boy is wearing a helmet. Football
is a rough sport. The helmet protects his head
from getting hurt if he gets hit.
5. Look at the photo again. Tell your partner
what else the boy is wearing to protect him.
(Possible answer: face guard, shoulder pads)
6. Tell your partner what you wear to protect
you from the cold. Use this sentence frame:
When it is cold I wear
to
protect me.
7. Now lets say protect together three more
times: protect, protect, protect.
Word 4
separate
MOVEMENT
word separate. (Point to the sandwich in
the photo.) See the sandwich. It is in two
parts. There is a space between the two
parts because the sandwich was separated or
moved apart.
5. Lets separate our hands. Now lets put them
together. If we separate and put our hands
together over and over what will we be
doing? (clapping) Lets clap.
6. Lets put two books on top of each other on
the desk. Now lets separate them.
7. Now lets say separate together three more
times: separate, separate, separate.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
wild
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
wild
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is wild. Say

it with me: wild. Wild means living free in
nature, not tamed or trained. Wild animals
live in the forests and jungles. They are free to
go where they want. Pets are not wild. They
live in our homes.
2. En espaol, wild quiere decir que vive libre
en la naturaleza, que no ha sido entrenado o
domesticado, salvaje. Los animales salvajes
viven en los bosques y las junglas. Se pueden
mover libremente a donde quieran. Las
mascotas no son salvajes. Viven en
nuestras casas.
it is like to be wild. (Point to the elephants in
the photo.) These elephants are wild. They live
in nature. They can go wherever they want to.
They are not tamed by people. They are wild
and free.
66
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk to your partner about how wild animals
are different from pets. (Wild animals live in
nature, but pets live in houses. Wild animals
arent friendly to people, but pets are. You can
cuddle and hold some pets, but wild animals
can be dangerous.)
5. Tell your partner one wild animal that you
would like to learn about. Tell why.
6. Now lets say wild together three more times:
wild, wild, wild.
Word 1
pick off
Word 2
pick up
Word 1
pick off
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use pick off to describe

removing something. Say it with me: pick off.
Pick off means remove small pieces, usually
one at a time. Jenna likes to pick off the
petals of a daisy one at a time.
2. En espaol, to pick off quiere decir arrancar o
quitar pedacitos, normalmente uno por uno.
A Jenna arranca uno por uno los ptalos de
la margarita.
3. This picture shows the words pick off. One
monkey picks off the bugs on the head of the
other monkey. It is removing the bugs one by
one.
4. I am going to describe some situations. If

you think I am picking off something, say,
You are picking them off. If not, dont say
anything.
I am taking off the bits of uff on my sweater.
I am putting stickers into a photo album.
I am removing the confetti from my hair.
I am placing the owers into a vase.
5. Now I am going to say some sentences.
Repeat the sentences. Replace the words take
away with pick off.
The monkey will take away the bugs.
I will take away the brown leaves from the
plant.
I will take away the bits of dirt on my shoes.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: pick
off, pick off, pick off.
Word 2
pick up
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use pick up to describe

something we do to things. Say it with me:
pick up. Pick up means to lift and carry.
When you drop something, you should pick
it up. If you drop a pencil, pick up the pencil
from the oor.
2. En espaol, to pick up quiere decir levantar,
recoger del suelo. Cuando se te cae algo,
lo levantas. Si se te cae un lpiz, lo recoges
del piso.
3. This picture shows the words pick up. The
grandfather picks up his granddaughter. He
lifts her up and carries her on his back.
4. I am going to name some things. If you can

pick one up, say pick up. If not, say cannot
pick up.
a pencil on the oor
a book on the shelf
a house on the street
a car on the road
a dish on the table
5. I am going to say some words. If they mean
the same as pick up, say pick up. If not, say
nothing.
lift
drop
raise
fall down
6. Repeat the words three times with me: pick
up, pick up, pick up.
68
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Jeffrey Jackson/Alamy Images. (b) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
Word 3
do a lot
Word 4
like a lot
do a lot
Word 3
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use do a lot to describe how

often or how much we do things. Say it
with me: do a lot. Do a lot means carry out
an action often or do a large amount. We
should do a lot of studying before a test.
2. En espaol, to do a lot quiere decir hacer
algo a menudo o mucho. Hay que estudiar en
gran cantidad antes de un examen.
3. This picture shows the phrase do a lot. It
shows a family doing things together. They do
a lot of activities together and take pictures of
them.
4. Talk to your partner about something you do

a lot. Tell what you like to do a lot. (Examples
include: color, draw, read, play)
5. Some people do a lot of work. Talk with your
partner about people you know who do a lot
of work. Tell what they do.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: do a
lot, do a lot, do a lot.
Word 4
like a lot
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use like a lot to describe how

much we like something. Say it with me: like
a lot. Like a lot means to enjoy very much.
Pizza is something we like a lot.
2. En espaol, to like a lot quiere decir
gustarle mucho a uno. A nosotros nos gusta
mucho la pizza.
3. This picture shows the phrase like a lot. These
people really like to play soccer. Soccer is a
sport they like a lot.
4. I am going to name some foods. If you like
the food a lot, say like a lot. If not, say do
not like a lot.
pizza
spinach
tacos
apples
liver
5. I am going to talk about baseball and children.

Then Ill ask questions. Answer yes or no.
Mel plays baseball everyday. Is baseball
something he likes a lot?
Sam never plays baseball. Is baseball
Rosa watches a lot of baseball games on
television. Is baseball something she likes
a lot?
Tori never saw a baseball game. Is baseball
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: like
a lot, like a lot, like a lot.
70
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) SW Productions/Getty Images. (b) Keith Eng 2007/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 1
Animal Moms and Dads
parent, father, family,

mother, children, baby
parent
father
family
mother
children
baby
ROUTINE
71
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Keith Brofsky/Getty Images. (tc) Bananastock/PunchStock. (tr) Photodisc/Getty Images.
(bl) Masterfile. (bm) Adam Crowley/Getty Images. (br) Brooke Fasani/Corbis.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
appreciate
Word 2
cooperate
Unit 2 Week 2 Little Red Hen
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
appreciate
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is appreciate. Say it

with me: appreciate. To appreciate means to
be thankful for something. When someone
does something nice for us we appreciate it.
If your friend lets you play with a favorite toy,
you appreciate it. You feel thankful.
2. En espaol, to appreciate quiere decir estar
agradecido por algo, apreciar. Cuando
alguien hace algo bueno por nosotros, lo
apreciamos. Por ejemplo, si tu amigo te deja
jugar con su juguete preferido, tu aprecias el
favor. Te sientes agradecido de que tu amigo
fue tan amable contigo.
3. To appreciate in English and apreciar in Spanish
are cognates. They sound almost the same and
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is cooperate.

Say it with me: cooperate. To cooperate
means to work together well. When you
play a game you need to cooperate. You need
to take turns and play by the rules.
2. En espaol, to cooperate quiere decir trabajar
con otros por un mismo n, cooperar.
Cuando juegas a algo con otros tienes que
cooperar. Necesitas esperar tu turno y seguir
las reglas del juego.
3. To cooperate in English and cooperar in
languages.
74
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/Jupiterimages. (b) Pixland/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
someone appreciating something. (Point to
the girl opening the present in the photo.)
The girl is opening a present. She appreciates
the present. She is thankful to her family
for giving her the present. You can see she
appreciates it because she is smiling.
5. On Thanksgiving we sometimes tell each other
what we are thankful for. Tell your partner
one thing you appreciate or are thankful for.
Use the word appreciate to tell about it.
6. Think about your next birthday. What would
you appreciate getting? Use the sentence
frame: On my birthday I would appreciate
7. Now lets say appreciate together three more
times: appreciate, appreciate, appreciate.
Word 2
cooperate
MOVEMENT
the word cooperate means. (Point to the
children at the globe in the photo.) See all
of these children using the globe. They are
working together nicely. They are cooperating
by sharing the globe.
5. Lets act out cooperating by sharing a globe
like the children in the picture. Come up and
point to a place on our globe. Remember to
cooperate.
6. Lets pretend we have to move a great big
sofa. If we cooperate we can move it. Ready,
lets cooperate and move our sofa to the front
of the room.
7. Now lets say cooperate together three more
times: cooperate, cooperate, cooperate.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
partner
Word 4
responsibility
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
partner
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is partner. Say

it with me: partner. Partner means a person
who does something together with someone
else. When you dance with one other person,
you are that persons partner. That person is
your partner too.
2. En espaol, partner quiere decir la persona
con la que completas una actividad,
compaero. Cuando bailas con otra persona,
eres el compaero de esa persona. Esa persona
tambin es tu compaero.
a partner is. (Point to the boy in the photo.)
This boy is raking. Who is his partner? (the
girl) What is she doing? (raking with him) Now
look at the girl. Who is her partner?
(the boy)
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is responsibility.

Say it with me: responsibility. A responsibility
is something you are supposed to do. It is your
responsibility to do your homework. It is my
responsibility to help to teach you new things.
2. En espaol, responsibility quiere decir algo
que debes hacer, responsabilidad. Hacer
sus tareas es la responsabilidad de cada uno
de ustedes. Mi responsabilidad es ensearles
cosas nuevas.
3. Responsibility in English and responsibilidad
in Spanish are cognates. They sound almost
languages.
76
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Thinkstock/Jupiterimages. (b) Thinkstock/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. Lets take turns choosing a partner. Choose a
partner. Walk to the front of the room with
your partner.
6. Shake hands with your partner. What else can
you do with a partner? Show me. (Examples
include: high ve, clapping games, etc.)
7. Now lets say partner together three more
times: partner, partner, partner.
Word 4
responsibility
PARTNER TALK
someone taking care of her responsibility.
(Point to the girl in the photo.) This girl is
washing the dishes. Washing the dishes is her
special job in the family. It is something shes
supposed to do. Washing the dishes is her
responsibility.
5. Tell your partner one responsibility you have
at home. (Examples include: making the bed,
washing dishes, helping clean up)
6. Talk to your partner about your
responsibilities at school. Choose one and
complete the sentence: In school it is my
responsibility to
.
7. Now lets say responsibility together three
more times: responsibility, responsibility,
responsibility.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
scrumptious
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
scrumptious
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is scrumptious.

Say it with me: scrumptious. Scrumptious
means really delicious or great tasting.
When we eat something that is scrumptious
we sometimes smack our lips. Some people
think vegetables are scrumptious. Do you?
2. En espaol, scrumptious quiere decir muy
delicioso, que sabe muy bueno. Cuando
comemos algo muy delicioso, nos lamemos
los labios. Algunas personas piensan que las
verduras son deliciosas. Les parece a ustedes
que las verduras son deliciosas?
word scrumptious. (Point to the pizza in the
photo.) This pizza has lots of toppings that
make it look scrumptious. Imagine taking a
bite of this scrumptious pizza. Mmmmmmm.
78
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we are eating something
scrumptious. What sounds will we make? Lets
make them. (Possible responses: mmmmm,
smacking lips)
5. Now lets show that something tastes
scrumptious by rubbing our tummies after
we eat it.
6. Now lets say scrumptious together three more
times: scrumptious, scrumptious, scrumptious.
Word 1
some of
Word 2
all of
Word 1
some of
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use some of to describe an

amount. Say it with me: some of. Some of
means part of the whole. We do some of
our work in the morning and some of our
work in the afternoon.
2. En espaol, some of quiere decir una
parte de algo entero. Hacemos una parte de
nuestro trabajo por la maana y la otra parte
por la tarde.
3. This picture shows the words some of. It
shows three girls on a soccer team. They
are some of the girls on the team. There are
usually at least eleven players on a soccer
team.
4. I am going to describe parts of a book I read.

If you think I read some of the book, say You
read some of the book. If not, say nothing.
I read all the pages in the book.
I read the rst two pages of the book.
I read only the beginning of the book.
I read only the end of the book.
I read from the beginning to the end of the
book.
5. Now I am going to give you directions using
the words some of. Follow the directions. (Call
on a few children to respond.)
Name some of the children in our class.
Name some of the people in your family.
Name some of the animals in a zoo.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: some
of, some of, some of.
Word 2
all of
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use all of to describe amounts.

Say it with me: all of. All of means the entire
amount or the whole thing. You should not
eat dessert until you eat all of your supper.
Every night you must do all of your homework.
2. En espaol, all of quiere decir todo, la
parte entera. No debes comer postre hasta
comerte toda la cena. Cada noche, hay que
terminar todas las tareas.
3. This picture shows the words all of. It shows
the whole team. All of the people on the
soccer team are in the picture. There are
eleven players in the picture!
4. I am going to describe some things I cleaned.

Say, You cleaned all of it, if I cleaned it all.
If not say. You did not clean all of it.
I washed the whole oor.
I cleaned all of the rooms in my house.
I washed the top of my car.
I cleaned the entire garage.
5. I am going to say some sentence. Repeat each
sentence. Replace the words that tell about
the whole thing with the words all of it.
I read the whole story. (I read all of it.)
We ate the whole pizza. (We ate all of it.)
Sara nished the whole test. (She nished all
of it.)
I ran the whole race. (I ran all of it.)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: all of,
all of, all of.
80
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Jupiter Images/ BananaStock/Alamy Images. (b) Greatstock Photographic Library/Alamy Images.
Word 3
a bit of
Word 4
most of
Word 3
a bit of
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use a bit of to describe an

amount. Say it with me: a bit of. A bit of
means a very small amount or tiny part of
the whole. I only ate a bit of my breakfast,
so now I am very hungry.
2. En espaol, a bit of quiere decir un poquito
de una parte ms grande. Slo me com un
poquito parte de mi desayuno, y ahora tengo
hambre.
3. This picture shows the words a bit of. It
shows only one piece of a whole pizza. One
slice is a bit of a whole pizza.
4. Think about what the words a bit of mean. If I

say, I did a bit of my housework, what does
that mean? Discuss what work I might have
done and what I still might have left to do.
(Ask one or two pairs for their response.)
5. Take turns telling each other a bit of a story
you both read. Then nish telling the whole
story to each other.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: a bit
of, a bit of, a bit of.
Word 4
most of
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use most of to describe an

amount. Say it with me: most of. Most of
means almost everything, or a little less than
all of something. Most of the children ride
the bus, but some of them walk to school.
2. En espaol, most of quiere decir casi todo.
Casi todos los nios viajan a la escuela en
autobs, pero algunos se vienen caminando.
3. This picture shows the words most of.
Most of this pizza is left. Only a bit of it
was eaten.
4. Do you think most of us like dogs or cats

better? Lets vote to nd out. (Have children
raise their hands, and count the votes.) Now
lets complete this sentence with the word
cats or dogs: Most of us like
.
5. Now lets vote on two kinds of food. (Take a
vote and count to nd out if children prefer
liver or pizza.) Lets complete this sentence:
Most of us do not like to eat
.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: most
of, most of, most of.
82
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) BananaStock/Jupiterimages.
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 2
Little Red Hen
wheat, our, dough,

cookie, bread, cake
wheat
our
dough
cookie
bread
cake
ROUTINE
83
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) PhotoAlto/PunchStock. (tc) IT Stock/Polka Dot Images/PunchStock. (tr) IT Stock/Polka Dot Images/PunchStock.
(bl) Brian Tolbert/Royalty-Free/Corbis. (bm) Burke/Triolo/Getty Images. (br) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
useful
Unit 2 Week 3 Around Town
Word 2
variety
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
useful
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is useful. Say it with

me: useful. Useful means helpful. Glue is
useful if you need to stick things together. A
map is useful if you are lost and need to nd
out how to get somewhere.
2. En espaol, useful quiere decir algo que tiene
uso, prctico, til. La goma es til si tienes
cosas que necesitas pegar. Un mapa es til si
ests perdido y necesitas encontrar tu camino.
something useful. (Point to the computer in
the photo.) A computer is useful for many
things. It is useful if you want to send an
e-mail to someone. It is useful for doing
homework.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is variety. Say

it with me: variety. Variety means many
different kinds. There are a variety of books
in the library. There are a variety of foods in
the supermarket. Look at the variety of colors
we are all wearing.
2. En espaol, variety quiere decir muchos tipos
diferentes, variedad. Hay una variedad de
libros distintos en la biblioteca. La biblioteca
tiene muchos tipos de libros. Hay una variedad
de comida en el supermercado. Miren la
variedad de colores que tenemos puestos.
3. Variety in English and variedad in Spanish are
86
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/PunchStock. (b) Jeffrey Coolidge/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner something you use at home
that is useful to you. Tell how it is useful.
(Examples include: My crayons are useful
when I want to color. My bike is useful when I
want to get somewhere quickly.)
5. Pretend you want to write or talk to someone
who lives far away. Tell your partner what
would be useful to you. Heres an idea to help.
I want to talk to my Grandma. A telephone
would be useful.
6. Now lets say useful together three more
times: useful, useful, useful.
Word 2
variety
MOVEMENT
word variety. (Point to the different supplies
in the photo.) See all of these school supplies.
There are a variety of supplies. There are
pencils, a ruler, and scissors. What other
different kinds of supplies do you see? (paper
clips, erasers, notebook)
5. Lets make a variety of faces. We can make
happy faces, sad faces, or silly faces. Ready,
lets make our variety of faces.
6. Lets take turns picking out a variety of
crayons from a box of crayons. Did we all pick
the same colors?
7. Now lets say variety together three more
times: variety, variety, variety.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
amazed
Word 4
service
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
amazed
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is amazed. Say

it with me: amazed. Amazed means very
surprised and impressed. You would be
amazed if you saw an elephant walk into
our room!
2. En espaol, amazed quiere decir sorprendido
e impresionado. Se impresionaran si vieran
un elefante entrar a nuestro saln de clase.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows how
it looks to be amazed. (Point to the girl and
woman in the photo.) Look at the faces on
the girl and woman. That is how people look
when they are amazed. These people must
have seen something on the computer that
surprised them.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is service. Say it

with me: service. Service means work or help
that someone does for others. A reghter
does a service by putting out res. Some stores
have better service than others.
2. En espaol, service quiere decir un trabajo
o una ayuda que uno hace por otra persona,
servicio. Los bomberos prestan un servicio al
apagar los incendios. Algunas tiendas ofercen
mejor servicio que otras.
3. Service in English and servicio in Spanish are
88
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Iconica/Jose Luis Pelaez/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we are reading a book and are
amazed at what we read. Have you ever read
something that amazed you? What was it?
5. You can see lots of amazing things on
television. Lets pretend we are watching a
television program and are amazed at what
we see.
6. Now lets say amazed together three more
times: amazed, amazed, amazed.
Word 4
service
PARTNER TALK
word service. (Point to the dentist in the
photo.) This dentist provides a service. She
helps take care of peoples teeth. One service
a dentist provides is cleaning teeth. What
other services do dentists provide? (Examples
include: lling cavities, taking x-rays)
5. Tell your partner about a place you went to
that had good service. What did the people
who worked there do for you?
6. Pretend a waiter gave you good service in a
restaurant. Take turns telling your partner
what you might say to the waiter. Use the
word service in your sentence. (Thank you for
the good service. I really appreciate the great
service.)
7. Now lets say service together three more
times: service, service, service.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
frequently
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
frequently
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is frequently. Say it

with me: frequently. Frequently means often
or many times. In school we frequently stand
in line for things. To stay healthy, you should
wash your hands frequently.
2. En espaol, frequently quiere decir
que ocurre a menudo o muchas veces,
frecuentemente. En el colegio hacemos las
frecuentemente. Para mantenerse saludable
uno debe lavarse las manos frecuentemente.
3. Frequently in English and frecuentemente
languages.
something that is done frequently. (Point
to the children in line in the photo.) These
children line up every day to go on the school
bus. They frequently line up for the bus.
90
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) SW Productions/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner something you do frequently
at school. (Examples include: read, get in line,
do math, talk to friends, take tests)
6. Tell your partner something you do frequently
at home. (Examples include: eat, play, help
parents, watch television)
7. Now lets say frequently together three more
times: frequently, frequently, frequently.
Word 1
hold back
Unit 2 Week 3 Map It
Word 2
hold up
Word 1
hold back
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use hold back to describe the

way we stop something. Say it with me: hold
back. Hold back means to keep someone or
something from doing something. A fence
will hold back the horses in the eld.
2. En espaol, to hold back quiere decir
retener, evitar que alguien o algo pase.
Una cerca puede retener a los caballos en
la pradera.
3. This picture shows the words hold back. It
shows a crossing guard using the stop sign to
stop the cars. He holds back the cars so the
school children can cross the street.
4. Think about what hold back means. If I say,

I hold back my dog from running across the
street, what does that mean? What do you
think I use to hold back my dog? Share your
answer with your partner.
5. When might people want to hold back
someone or something? I will give you some
examples to talk about with your partner.
Use the words hold back to talk about each
example.
someone who is crossing the street in front of
a moving car
someone who is about to step into a puddle
a dog that is running toward a ower garden
6. Repeat the words three times with me: hold
back, hold back, hold back.
Word 2
hold up
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use hold up to describe moving

something into a higher position. Say it
with me: hold up. Hold up means to move
something up high, to raise. When you want
to answer a question, you hold up your hand.
2. En espaol, to hold up quiere decir alzar,
levantar. Cuando quieres contestar una
pregunta, levantas la mano.
3. This picture shows the words hold up. The girl
raises her picture for us to see. She holds up
the picture.
4. Lets all hold up both hands. Now hold up only

one hand. Now do not hold up your hands.
5. I will tell you what to hold up. Follow
my directions. Hold up a pencil. Put it back.
Hold up a book. Put it back. (Continue telling
children to hold up other items they have
available to them.)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: hold
up, hold up, hold up.
92
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Blend Images/Alamy Images. (b) Blend Images/PunchStock.
Word 3
bring up
Unit 2 Week 3 Map It
Word 4
bring out
Word 3
bring up
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use bring up to describe

something families do. Say it with me: bring
up. Bring up means to raise or care for
children as they grow up. Not all families
bring up their children the same way.
2. En espaol, to bring up quiere decir criar,
cuidar nios hasta que crezcan. No todas las
familias cran a sus hijos de la misma manera.
3. This picture shows the words bring up. It
shows one thing these parents do to raise or
bring up their daughter. What is one thing
they do to bring up their daughter? (They
cook together.)
4. Pretend you have a new baby in your family.

Tell your partner how the parents might bring
up the baby. Use the words bring up in your
talk.
5. Draw a picture of someone who is doing
a good job of bringing up a child. Use the
words bring up to tell your partner what is
happening in the picture.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: bring
up, bring up, bring up.
Word 4
bring out
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use bring out to describe

what we do when we lead something from
somewhere. Say it with me: bring out. Bring
out means to lead out of, to take something
out from where it was. Some people bring
out their best dishes when they have company
for dinner.
2. En espaol, to bring out quiere decir sacar
algo de un lugar. Algunas personas sacan su
mejor vajilla cuando llega visita a cenar.
3. This picture shows the words bring out. The
waitress takes the meals from the kitchen. She
brings out two meals for people to eat.
4. Suppose you were having some friends over to

play. Tell your partner what things you might
bring out. Discuss why you would bring out
these things.
5. If I say, I will bring out all my crayons, what
does that mean? What other art supplies
might I bring out? Discuss the answers with
your partner.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: bring
out, bring out, bring out
94
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Michel Touraine/Jupiterimages. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 3
On the Map
park
park, pond, playground,

post ofce, street, school
pond
playground
FPO
post ofce
street
school
ROUTINE
95
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (tc) Comstock/PunchStock. (tr) Comstock/PunchStock.
(bl) Cen Lu/Pixtal/age fotostock. (bm) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) John Flournoy/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
collapse
Unit 2 Week 4 The Squeaky Floor
Word 2
company
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
collapse
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is collapse. Say it

with me: collapse. Collapse means cave in, or
fall down. When you build a block tower too
high it can fall down or collapse. If you do not
put a tent up correctly, it can collapse.
2. En espaol, to collapse quiere decir
derrumbarse o caerse. Si uno construye
una torre de cubos demasiado alta, se puede
derrumbar. Si uno no arma su carpa de la
manera correcta, se puede caer.
word collapse. (Point to the tower in the
photo.) See this tower. It is a little crooked.
The boy has his hand out because he does not
want the tower to collapse, or fall down.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is company.

Say it with me: company. Company means
people who are together with you. Playing
alone is not as much fun as playing with
company.
2. En espaol, company quiere decir las
personas que estn junto a ti, compaa.
Jugar slo no es tan divertido como jugar en la
compaa de alguien.
3. Company in English and compaa in Spanish
word company. (Point to the children in
the photo.) See all of the children. They are
company that the birthday girl invited to her
party. It is fun to have company at a party.
98
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Christina Kennedy/Alamy Images. (b) Purestock/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets all stand up. Then when I say the word
collapse, we will all slowly collapse to the
oor. Ready: Collapse.
5. Now lets pretend to make a block tower.
Keep building until I say, Oh no, it collapsed.
Then watch your tower fall. (Have children
build for a few seconds, then say Oh no, it
collapsed!)
6. Now lets say collapse together three more
times: collapse, collapse, collapse.
Word 2
company
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner who you would like to invite
to your house for company when you play.
6. Do you like to have company when you watch
TV? Why or why not? Use this sentence to
talk to your partner about it: I like/do not like
to have company when I watch TV because
.
7. Now lets say company together three more
times: company, company, company.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
construct
Word 4
entire
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
construct
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is contruct. Say

it with me: construct. To construct means to
make or build. When we make a building
with blocks, we construct the building. What
else can we construct with blocks? (Examples
include: city, tower, castle)
2. En espaol, to construct quiere decir hacer
una construccin, construir. Cuando hacemos
una torre con cubos estamos construyendo la
torre. Qu otras cosas podemos construir con
nuestros cubos? (una ciudad, un edicio, un
castillo)
3. To construct in English and construir in
languages.
MOVEMENT
someone constructing. (Point to the paper
chain in the photo.) This teacher is showing
the children how to construct paper chains.
Then she will give the children the things they
need to construct or make their own paper
chains.
5. Lets pretend we are constructing paper
chains like the children in the photo. First we
cut the paper. Then we glue it into a circle.
Now we cut another piece and put it through
our rst circle.
6. Now lets pretend we are constructing a big
castle with our blocks. Lets take our time
because we dont want our castle to collapse!
7. Now lets say construct together three more
times: construct, construct, construct.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is entire. Say

it with me: entire. Entire means all, or the
whole thing. If all of the children in our class
are in the room, the entire class is in the room.
If you put your hand into a bowl of water,
your entire hand will be wet.
2. En espaol, entire quiere decir todo o algo
completo, entero. Si todos los nios en
nuestra clase estn en el saln, la clase entera
est en el saln. Si pones tu mano en un plato
hondo lleno de agua, tu mano entera quedar
mojada.
3. Entire in English and entero in Spanish are
entire
MOVEMENT
word entire. (Point to the daffodils in the
photo.) See the owers. They are daffodils.
The whole meadow is covered with owers.
The entire meadow has daffodils.
5. Put a crayon on your desk. Lets cover part of
the crayon with our hands. Now lets cover the
entire crayon. Can you still see the crayon? If
you can see part of it, you did not cover the
entire crayon.
6. Only the boys stand up. Now sit down. Next,
only the girls stand up. Now sit down. Get
ready. Now I want the entire group to stand
up. Good. Now I want the entire group to
sit down.
7. Now lets say entire together three more
times: entire, entire, entire.
100
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Purestock/Getty Images. (b) Ron Nichols/USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
material
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
material
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is material.

Say it with me: material. Material means
something you need to make things. The
material you need to make clothing is cloth.
The material you need to make a bookcase is
wood or metal.
2. En espaol, material quiere decir lo que
necesitas para hacer cosas, material. El
material que se necesita para hacer ropa es
tela. El material que se necesita para hacer una
estantera para tus libros es madera o metal.
3. Material in English and material in Spanish are
materials. (Point to the paper and crayons
in the photo.) These children are using art
materials to make pictures. The materials they
have are crayons and paper.
102
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/Ryan McVay/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Talk to your partner about an art project you
made. Tell what materials you used. (Examples
include: crayons, paint, paper, markers)
6. Talk to your partner about the materials you
need to do your homework. Use this sentence
frame: The materials I need to do homework
are
.
7. Now lets say material together three more
times: material, material, material.
Word 1
clean up
Unit 2 Week 4 The Pigs, the Wolf, and the Mud
Word 2
clean out
Word 1
clean up
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use clean up to describe what

people do when there is a mess. Say it with
me: clean up. Clean up means tidy up or
remove the dirt or mess. After you cook, you
should clean up the pots and pans.
2. En espaol, to clean up quiere decir limpiar,
lavar, poner en orden las cosas. Despus de
cocinar, hay que lavar las ollas.
3. This picture shows the words clean up. This
family cleans up after dinner. They clear the
table and wash the dishes.
4. Tell your partner about a time you helped

to clean up. What did you have to clean up?
What did you do?
5. Look around the classroom. Tell your partner
one thing you think should be cleaned up in
our room. Use the sentence: I think we should
clean up the
.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: clean
up, clean up, clean up.
Word 2
clean out
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use clean out to tell what we

do when we empty something. Say it with
me: clean out. Clean out means to empty
or remove everything from a place. Before
washing the shelves, we will clean out the
refrigerator.
2. En espaol, to clean out quiere decir vaciar,
desocupar un espacio, sacar lo que hay
adentro. Antes de limpiar el refrigerador hay
que sacar todo.
3. This picture demonstrates the words clean
out. The children are helping to clean out the
room. They are taking all of the papers out
and recycling them.

each sentence. Replace the word empty with
the words clean out.
I empty my desk.
I empty my schoolbag.
I empty my lunchbox.
5. Think about what the words clean out
mean. I am going to describe some situations.
If you think I am cleaning something out, clap
and say, Youre cleaning it out. If not, say
nothing.
Im taking all of the stuff out of the closet.
Im putting all of my socks in the drawer.
Im removing all of the dirt from the birdcage.
Im lling a bag with groceries.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: clean
out, clean out, clean out.
104
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Corbis. (b) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
Word 3
let in
Unit 2 Week 4 The Pigs, the Wolf, and the Mud
Word 4
fall in
Word 3
let in
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use let in to describe what we

do when someone wants to enter a place. Say
it with me: let in. Let in means do something
to help or allow someone to enter. If a visitor
knocks on our door, we let in the visitor by
opening the door.
2. En espaol, to let in quiere decir permitir
que algo o alguien entre. Si una visita toca
la puerta, lo dejamos entrar si le abrimos la
puerta.
3. This picture shows the words let in. The store
owner is opening the door for his customers.
He wants to let in the customers who come to
his store.
4. Ill say the name of someone or something.

Say Let in, if you would let them into your
house. Say Not let in, if you would not.
your best friend
a tiger
a member of your family
your dog
a stranger
5. Im going to describe some actions. Raise your
hand and say Let in, if I am telling about
letting someone or something in. Do nothing
if I am not.
Im opening the door for my friend to come in.
Im opening the cage for the bird to y in.
Im opening the door so my friend can leave.
Im opening the door for the bird to y away.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: let in,
let in, let in.
Word 4
fall in
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use fall in to describe what

might happen to a weak building or other
kind of structure. Say it with me: fall in. Fall in
means cave in, collapse, or fall down. If the
wind blows too hard, a tent may fall in.
2. En espaol, to fall in quiere decir derrumbarse,
desplomarse, caerse. Con un viento fuerte,
una carpa puede desplomarse.
3. This picture shows the words fall in. Look
at what happened to the roof of the house.
Something caused the roof to fall in.
4. Suppose you are walking on a wooden oor

and the oor falls in. Tell why this might
happen. Start your discussion with the
sentence: The oor might fall in
if
.
5. What might cause a roof of a house to fall
in? Think of as many reasons as you can, and
discuss them with your partner. (Examples
include: storms, snow, wind, termites)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: fall in,
fall in, fall in.
106
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Longview/Getty Images. (b) Kirk Anderson/Jupiterimages.
litter, mud, mess,

dust, trash, smell
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 4
The Pigs, the Wolf, and the Mud
litter
mud
mess
dust
trash
smell
ROUTINE
107
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Jill Braaten. (tc) Photographers Choice/Getty/PunchStock. (tr) Pixtal/PunchStock.
(bl) Jupiterimages/Comstock Images/Alamy Images. (bm) Image Source/PunchStock. (br) Image Source/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
entertain
Unit 2 Week 5 Beth and the Band
Word 2
perform
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
entertain
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is entertain. Say

it with me: entertain. To entertain means
to amuse someone or hold their interest.
A funny cartoon entertains most children.
You can entertain people by telling them an
interesting story or a joke.
2. En espaol, to entertain quiere decir divertir a
alguien o mantener su atencin, entretener.
Una caricatura graciosa entretiene a la
mayora de nios. Uno puede entretener a
alguien rerindole un cuento o un chiste.
3. To entertain in English and entretener in
languages.
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows children
trying to entertain. (Point to the children in
the photo.) These children entertain people
by dressing up and putting on a play. Maybe
they are singing songs, too. These children
entertain the people who watch them act and
sing.
5. Sometimes we have to think of things to
entertain ourselves. Tell your partner what
you do at home to entertain yourself. What do
you do to have fun? (Examples include: read,
play outside, watch TV, draw pictures)
6. Imagine a friend is coming to your house to
visit you. Talk to your partner about what you
can do to entertain your friend.
7. Now lets say entertain together three more
times: entertain, entertain, entertain.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
MOVEMENT
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is perform. Say

it with me: perform. To perform means to
put on some kind of show; to use your talent
in front of people. Singers perform on stage.
Guitar players perform in concerts. Actors
perform in plays.
2. En espaol, to perform quiere decir participar
en un espectculo, mostrar tu talento en
frente de otras personas. En un espectculo,
los cantantes cantan, los guitarristas
interpretan y los actores actan. Cada uno
muestra su talento en un espectculo.
people performing. (Point to the clarinet
players in the photo.) These people are playing
clarinets. They perform in an orchestra. They
play their music for others to hear.
perform
4. Lets pretend we are performing in a band.

Think of the instrument you want to play.
Now lets all perform in the show.
5. Now lets pretend we are a group of dancers.
Think about what kind of dance you would
like to perform. Now, lets perform our dances.
6. Now lets say perform together three more
times: perform, perform, perform.
110
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Dirk Anschutz/Stone/Getty Images. (b) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Andrew Resek.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
brilliant
Word 4
audience
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
brilliant
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is brilliant. Say it

with me: brilliant. Brilliant means very bright,
smart, talented, or skillful. If a basketball
player makes the basket that wins the game,
that player makes a brilliant play. If you
think of a way to solve a problem, you have a
brilliant idea.
2. En espaol, brilliant quiere decir destacado
por inteligencia o talento, brillante. Si un
jugador de baloncesto anota el punto ganador
del partido, ese jugador ha hecho una jugada
brillante. Si solucionas un problema difcil,
eres brillante.
3. Brilliant in English and brillante in Spanish are
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is audience. Say

it with me: audience. Audience means the
people who are watching a show. When you
go to a movie, you are in the audience. When
you watch a television program, you are part
of the audience.
2. En espaol, audience quiere decir las
personas que ven un espectculo, audiencia.
Cuando vas al cine, eres parte de la audiencia.
Cuando ves un programa en la televisin, eres
parte de la audiencia del programa.
3. Audience in English and audiencia in Spanish
112
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source Black/Getty Images. (b) Digital vision/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
something that is brilliant. (Point to the girl in
the photo.) This girl will solve a math problem
that is very difcult. She knows she can do it
because she is very smart. She is brilliant!
5. Talk to your partner about a game or sport
you saw. Tell your partner about the most
brilliant play in the game.
6. Tell your partner about someone you think
is brilliant. Tell what the person does that
is brilliant. Use this sentence frame to
help: I think
is a brilliant
.
7. Now lets say brilliant together three more
times: brilliant, brilliant, brilliant.
Word 4
audience
MOVEMENT
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows an
audience. (Point to the clown.) Look at the
clown. He is performing. Hes making a
balloon animal. (Point to the children.) The
children are watching him perform. The
children are the audience.
5. Lets take turns being an audience. First, Ill
pretend to play a guitar in a band. You be the
audience. (Act out playing a guitar.) Did you
like the show? When the audience likes the
show, they clap.
6. Now take turns being the audience with your
partner. First one partner will pretend to sing,
dance, or play an instrument. The other will
act out being the audience. Then switch roles
and act out the other part.
7. Now lets say audience together three more
times: audience, audience, audience.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
enjoy
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
enjoy
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is enjoy. Say it

with me: enjoy. Enjoy means to have fun or
to like a lot. If you like to swim, you enjoy
swimming. If you like to read, you enjoy
reading. If you like pizza, you enjoy pizza.
2. En espaol, to enjoy quiere decir sacar
diversin o gusto de algo, disfrutar. Si te
gusta nadar, disfrutas la natacin. Si te gusta
leer, disfrutas la lectura. Si te gusta la pizza,
disfrutas mucho al comer una pizza.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows people
enjoying something. (Point to the children
in the photo.) These children are eating
watermelon. They enjoy watermelon. How
can you tell that they enjoy watermelon?
(They are smiling.)
114
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk to your partner about what you enjoy at
school. Do you enjoy playing outside? Which
do you enjoy more, art or music?
5. Tell your partner about a place you enjoy
visiting. Why do you enjoy this place?
6. Now lets say enjoy together three more times:
enjoy, enjoy, enjoy.
Word 1
put on
Word 2
put away
Word 1
put on
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use put on to describe what

people who entertain us do. Say it with
me: put on. Put on means to present
entertainment of some kind. The school
band will put on a concert for the school.
2. En espaol, to put on quiere decir presentar
un espectculo o una funcin, como un
concierto o una obra de teatro. La orquesta
de la escuela presentar un concierto.
3. This picture shows the words put on. It shows
two girls in fancy dresses who put on a show.
The show is for their family and friends.
4. Lets pretend to put on a concert. Get ready

to play your favorite instrument and then lets
put on our concert.
5. Now lets pretend to put on a play. Partners
can take turns coming up on stage and
pretend to act in a play for the rest of the
children. We can all have turns to put on our
pretend play.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: put on,
put on, put on.
Word 2
put away
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use put away to tell what we

can do with things that need to be put back.
Say it with me: put away. Put away means
return things to where they belong. When
we nish playing, we should put away
our toys.
2. En espaol, to put away quiere decir guardar
las cosas en su lugar. Despus de jugar, hay
que guardar nuestros juguetes.
3. This picture shows the words put away. At the
end of the day, the teacher puts the toys back
into the box where they belong. She wants to
put away all the toys.
4. I am going to describe some situations. Then I

will ask a question. Answer yes or no.
I took the books off the shelf to clean the
shelf. After I clean the shelf, should I put away
the books?
We are hungry, so I made a pizza. Should I put
away the pizza?
I washed and dried my clothes. Should I put
away my clothes?
5. Think about what the words put away mean.
I am going to describe some situations. If
you think I am putting away something, clap
and say, Youre putting it away! If not, say
nothing.
Im drying a spoon and putting it into a
drawer.
Im taking my coat out of the closet and
putting it on me.
Im taking off my hat and hanging it up.
Im closing the jar of pickles and putting it in
the refrigerator.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: put
away, put away, put away.
116
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/PunchStock. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Word 3
sing with
Word 4
sing along
Word 3
sing with
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use sing with when someone

sings along with the music. Say it with me:
sing with. Sing with means use your voice to
make music as someone plays an instrument.
The girl sings with the boy who plays the
piano.
2. En espaol, to sing with quiere decir
acompaar cantando a alguien que toca un
instrumento musical. La cantante acompaa
al nio que toca el piano.
3. This picture shows the words sing with. It
shows people singing with the piano player.
4. Lets pretend we are singing with a band.

Some of us can pretend to be the band. The
rest of us will sing with you.
5. Now lets work in pairs. Take turns pretending
to sing with your partner who is playing the
guitar.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: sing
with, sing with, sing with.
Word 4
sing along
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use sing along to describe what

we do in a group. Say it with me: sing along.
Sing along means make music with your
voice together in a group. I like to sing along
with the choir.
2. En espaol, to sing along quiere decir cantar
en un grupo. Me gusta cantar con el coro.
3. This picture shows the words sing along. It
shows the members of the choir who sing
along together.
4. Think about what sing along means. Then

answer each question by saying yes or no.
When you sing along, do you sing alone?
When people sing along, do they sing the
same song?
Can three people sing along in a group?
5. Ill name some groups. If I name a group in
which people sing along, say sing along. If
not, say nothing.
a choir
a baseball team
a reading club
a singing group
6. Repeat the words three times with me: sing
along, sing along, sing along.
118
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Bananastock/Jupiterimages. (b) Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 5
Beth and the Band
music, band, drum,

guitar, song, instruments
music
band
drum
guitar
song
instruments
ROUTINE
119
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) imageshop/PunchStock. (tc) Digital Vision/PunchStock. (tr) C Squared Studios/Getty Images/Getty Images.
(bl) Ingram Publishing/Fotosearch Stock Photography. (bm) Digital Vision/age fotostock. (br) Reed Kaestner/Corbis.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
amuse
Unit 3 Week 1 On My Way to School
Word 2
delighted
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
amuse
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is amuse. Say it

with me: amuse. To amuse means to make
someone laugh or to entertain them. You
can amuse people in many different ways. For
example, you can amuse people by singing to
them or telling jokes.
2. En espaol, to amuse quiere decir hacer que
alguien se ra o entretener a una persona,
divertir. Puedes entretener a una persona
cantndole o contndole chistes.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows what it
is like to amuse. (Point to the lions mask in the
photo.) See the lions mask on this childs head.
Its funny to see a lion on top of someones
head. Funny things like this amuse us.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is delighted. Say

it with me: delighted. Delighted means very
pleased or happy. When good things happen
to us we are delighted. We can also be delighted
or happy to do good things for others.
2. En espaol, delighted quiere decir estar
muy contento o satisfecho, encantado.
Cuando nos pasan cosas buenas nos sentimos
encantados.
3. Now lets look at a picture of people that are
delighted. (Point to the children hugging in
the photo.) Something happened that made
these children so happy they are hugging
each other. They are delighted. What might
have happened that made them delighted?
(Examples include: They won a game.)
122
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Sean Justice/Corbis. (b) amana productions inc./Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Think about a funny story you read. Tell your
partner what happened in the story to amuse
you.
5. Think about how you would amuse a puppy.
Would you amuse the puppy the same way
you would amuse a friend? Talk to your
partner about the different ways you would
amuse a puppy and a friend.
6. Now lets say amuse together three more
times: amuse, amuse, amuse.
Word 2
delighted
MOVEMENT
4. We can use our faces to show we are
delighted. Lets pretend we just made a
beautiful picture and we are delighted. We
can use a big smile to show that we are
delighted.
5. We can also show we are delighted by
clapping. Lets pretend we just saw a great
show and we are delighted. Lets clap to show
how pleased and delighted we are.
6. Now lets say delighted together three more
times: delighted, delighted, delighted.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
humorous
Word 4
mood
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
humorous
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is humorous.

Say it with me: humorous. Humorous means
funny or silly. Jokes are humorous. They
make us laugh. Some cartoons are funny, or
humorous, too.
2. En espaol, humorous quiere decir gracioso
o chistoso. Los chistes son graciosos. Nos
hacen rer. Algunas caricaturas son graciosas
tambin.
3. Now lets look at a humorous picture. (Point
to the dogs in the photo.) These dogs look
very funny. They are wearing costumes.
Dogs do not usually wear costumes. This is a
humorous picture because it makes us laugh.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is mood. Say it

with me: mood. Mood means how you feel in
your mind. If you feel happy, you are in a happy
mood. If you feel sad, you are in a sad mood.
2. En espaol, mood quiere decir cmo
te sientes en tu mente, humor. Si ests
contento, ests de buen humor. Si te sientes
fastidiado o enojado, ests de mal humor.
someones mood. (Point to the girls making
faces in the photo.) These girls are making
silly faces. You can tell what kind of mood
they are in. They are in a happy mood or a silly
mood. What might they do if they were in a
sad mood? (Examples include: cry, look sad)
124
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Imagestate/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the photo again. Tell your partner
what you think is humorous about it.
(Examples include: hat on dog, wrinkled skin,
sad faces, dog as a bride, dog as a groom,
tongue sticking out)
5. What is the most humorous show you have
ever seen? Tell your partner about it. Use this
sentence frame: The most humorous show I
have seen is
.
6. Now lets say humorous together three more
times: humorous, humorous, humorous.
Word 4
mood
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we are in a silly mood like the
girls in the photo. Lets make silly faces to
show we are in a silly mood.
5. Sometimes we are very serious and do not
want to laugh. Lets pretend we are in a
serious mood. Lets make faces to show our
serious mood.
6. Now lets say mood together three more
times: mood, mood, mood.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
ridiculous
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
ridiculous
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is ridiculous. Say

it with me: ridiculous. Ridiculous means so
silly it could not or should not really happen.
It is ridiculous to think a dog can talk. It is
ridiculous to think a rst grader can drive a car.
2. En espaol, ridiculous quiere decir tan tonto
que no podra ocurrir en vida real, ridculo. Es
ridculo pensar que un perro pueda hablar. Es
ridculo pensar que un nio de primero pueda
manejar un carro.
3. Ridiculous in English and ridculo in Spanish
something ridiculous. (Point to the frog
with a crown in the photo.) Remember the
story about a princess who kisses a frog and
the frog changes into a prince? This picture
shows a frog with a crown on its head as if it
is a prince or a king. This is ridiculous. A frog
cannot be a king.
126
PARTNER TALK
5. Talk to your partner about another thing
that would be ridiculous for an animal to do.
(Examples include: go to the movies, drive a
bus, sing a song)
6. Tell your partner one thing that would be
ridiculous to wear to school. (Examples
include: a swimming suit, a brides gown, an
animal costume)
7. Now lets say ridiculous together three more
times: ridiculous, ridiculous, ridiculous.
Word 1
late
Word 2
early
Word 1
late
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use late to describe a time of

day. Say it with me: late. Late means at night,
way after the day is done. If you go to bed
too late you will be tired in the morning.
2. En espaol, late quiere decir tarde; noche;
cuando ha terminado el da. Si te acuestas
tarde, estars cansado en la maana.
3. This picture shows the word late. It shows
a mom reading to her children in bed late
at night.
4. I am going to describe some situations. If they

happen when it is late say, It is late. If not,
say nothing.
The sun is high in the sky.
The stars are out.
I am eating breakfast.
It is dark out and I am fast asleep.
5. Now I am going to say some words. If the
word tells what it is like when it is late, say
yes, If not, say no.
dark
night
bright
sunny
6. Repeat the word three times with me: late,
late, late.
Word 2
early
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use early to describe a time of

day. Say it with me: early. Early means in the
morning, rst time of the day. The sun comes
up early in the morning.
2. En espaol, early quiere decir temprano; en
la maana; al comenzar el da. El sol sale
temprano en la maana.
3. This picture shows the word early. It shows a
family eating breakfast, so we know it is early
in the day. Most people eat breakfast early.
4. I am going to describe some situations. If they

happen when it is early say, It is early. If
not, say nothing.
We can see the sunrise.
The stars are out.
I am eating breakfast.
It is dark out and I am fast asleep.
5. Now I am going to say two words. Say which
word tells about the word early as a time
of day.
morning or evening
dark or light
breakfast or dinner
moonlight or sunlight
6. Repeat the word three times with me: early,
early, early.
128
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Purestock/PunchStock. (b) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
Word 3
hop in
Word 4
zip away
Word 3
hop in
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use hop in to tell how to enter

a vehicle. Say it with me: hop in. Hop in means
jump in or get quickly into a vehicle such as a
car or bus. Hop in the car and we will go for
a ride.
2. En espaol, to hop in quiere decir subirse
rpidamente a un vehculo, como un coche
o un autobs. Sbete al coche y vamos
a dar una vuelta.
3. This picture shows the words hop in. It shows
people in a horse drawn carriage. They are
waiting for some more riders to hop in. Then
they will all go for a ride.
4. Ill name some things we can hop in. Repeat

each sentence after me.
We hop in a car.
We hop on the train.
We hop on a bus.
We hop on the plane.
5. I will say some sentences. Raise your hand
if the sentence has the same meaning as I
hopped in a car. Do nothing if it does not.
I quickly got in the car.
I got out of the car.
I slowly entered the car.
I jumped into the car.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: hop in,
hop in, hop in.
Word 4
zip away
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use zip away to describe how

we move. Say it with me: zip away. Zip away
means to move on quickly. As soon as the
last passenger gets on the bus, it will zip
away.
2. En espaol, to zip away quiere decir salir
como disparado; salir como un rayo. En
cuanto se sube el ltimo pasajero, el autobs
sale disparado.
3. This picture shows the words zip away. These
people are riding on a roller coaster. As soon
as they get on the roller coaster, it zips away.
It quickly goes down the tracks.
4. Lets pretend we are waiting for the stoplight

to change. When it turns green, we will zip
away. Ill tell you when it turns green. Get
ready. It turned green! Now lets zip away.
5. Lets pretend we are getting on a school bus.
One by one, lets all get on. Once we all get
on, we will zip away. Get ready. Everybody
hop in the school bus. Okay, now lets zip
away.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: zip
away, zip away, zip away.
130
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Royalty-Free/Corbis. (b) Purestock/Getty Images.
boat, bus, cart,

bicycle, car, jeep
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 1
On My Way to School
boat
bus
cart
bicycle
car
jeep
ROUTINE
131
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (tc) Lars Niki/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill. (tr) Steve Estvanik/Corbis.
(bl) Kenneth McCray/SuperStock. (bm) D. Hurst/Alamy Images. (br) Truitt Photographics/Index Stock Imagery.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
connections
Unit 3 Week 2 Smile, Mike!
Word 2
possessions
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
connections
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is connections.

Say it with me: connections. Connections
mean the relations between things. When
you make a connection in your mind, you
understand the relation between things. A
book with pictures shows the connections
between the story and the pictures. You see
how the pictures go together with the story.
You see the connection.
2. En espaol, connections quiere decir unin
o relacin de dos cosas, conexiones. Cuando
lees un libro con dibujos, haces conexiones
entre los dibujos y el cuento. Ves cmo los
dibujos van con la historia.
3. Connections in English and conexiones in
languages.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is possessions.

Say it with me: possessions. Possessions means
things we own, things that belong to us.
Some of our possessions are our clothes, our
toys, and our furniture.
2. En espaol, possessions quiere decir las
cosas que te pertenecen, que son tuyas;
posesiones. Nuestra ropa y nuestros juguetes
son algunas de nuestras posesiones.
3. Possessions in English and posesiones in Spanish
word possessions. (Point to the toys in the
photo.) These toys are someones possessions.
What other possessions do you see in the
photo? (clothes, towels)
134
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Bananastock/PunchStock. (b) Digital Vision/Thomas Northcut/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
word connections. (Point to the teacher in
the photo.) The teacher is making connections
with her student by talking to her and showing
her things. The teacher is making connections or
getting together with her student.
5. When you make connections with people,
you do things with them because you have
a relationship. Talk with your partner about
how you make connections with other
children in your class. (We talk together. We
play together. We help each other.)
6. We can make connections with people who
live far away from us. Tell your partner one
way you can make connections with someone
who lives far away. (Examples include: writing
letters or e-mail, talking on the telephone)
7. Now lets say connections together three more
times: connections, connections, connections.
Word 2
possessions
PARTNER TALK
5. Possessions means more than one thing. But
sometimes we have one favorite possession.
Talk to your partner about your favorite
possession.
6. It is important to take care of your
possessions. Tell your partner which
possessions you take care of and what you
do to take care of them. (Examples include:
ClothesI take off my good clothes when I
play. ToysI put my toys away when I am
nished playing with them.)
7. Now lets say possessions together three more
times: possessions, possessions, possessions.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
relief
Word 4
support
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
relief
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is relief. Say it

with me: relief. Relief means something that
ends a tiring or painful event. Medicine can
give you relief from a cold. Food gives you
relief from being hungry.
2. En espaol, relief quiere decir descanso de un
evento cansn o doloroso, alivio. La medicina
te brinda alivio cuando ests enfermo. La
comida te da alivio del hambre.
word relief. (Point to the sleeping child the
photo.) This child is asleep. Sleep gives us
relief from being tired. When we work hard
we need relief. Sleep is a good relief from
hard work.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is support. Say

it with me: support. To support means to
help or hold up. If you are having trouble
doing something it is nice to have someone
support you. Your family supports you when
you need help. Friends support each other.
2. En espaol, support quiere decir ayudar
o sostener algo, apoyar. Tu familia y tus
amigos te apoyan cuando necesitas ayuda.
someone giving support. (Point to the teacher
helping the boy in the photo.) The teacher is
helping the boy do his work. This is how the
teacher supports the student. Who supports
you when you need help with your work
in school?
136
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Riser/Bruce Laurance/Getty Images. (b) Bananastock/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you have been working hard for a
long time doing homework. Tell your partner
what you would do for some relief.
5. Imagine you are at a party that is too noisy.
Tell your partner what you will do for relief.
Use this sentence frame: To get relief from the
noise I will
.
6. Now lets say relief together three more times:
relief, relief, relief.
Word 4
support
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner how you can support a friend
who needs help reading a story.
5. Talk to your partner about a time you needed
help. Who supported you? What did they do?
6. Now lets say support together three more
times: support, support, support.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
typical
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
typical
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is typical. Say it

with me: typical. Typical means usual, what
is expected. It is typical for a dog to bark if
it is excited.
2. En espaol, typical quiere decir normal, lo
que se espera de algo o alguien. Que un
perro ladre cuando se emociona es tpico.
3. Typical in English and tpico in Spanish are
it is like to be typical. (Point to the children
laughing in the photo.) Children like to laugh
and be silly. These children are being typical.
They are having fun like children usually do.
138
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Imagestate/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. Lets all pretend we are cats. When we act
like cats, we are doing the movements of a
typical cat.
6. Pretend someone just told us a very funny
joke. What is it typical to do when you hear a
funny joke? (laugh) Lets act typical after we
heard the joke.
7. Now lets say typical together three more
times: typical, typical, typical.
Word 1
here we are
Word 2
here I am
Word 1
here we are
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use here we are to let people

know where a group is. Say it with me: here
we are. Here we are means two or more
people are at a specic place. The guests for
dinner said, Here we are, when they arrived.
2. En espaol, here we are quiere decir aqu
estamos. Se usa para decir dnde estn
dos o ms personas. Los invitados a la cena
anunciaron, Aqu estamos.
3. This picture shows the phrase here we are. It
shows children arriving for a birthday party
saying, Here we are with your birthday
presents.
4. I am going to describe some situations.

Pretend you are in the situation. Say, Here
we are, if thats what you might say. If not,
say nothing.
You and your family go to someones house
for dinner. You knock on the door. The door
opens and you say
.
You go to the store by yourself. You walk in
and say
.
You and your friend are hiding behind a
tree. Another friend calls out Where are
you? You and your friend jump out and say
.
5. Answer each question with yes or no
If you walk into your bedroom, would you say
Here we are?
If you and your friends want to let your
teacher know where you are, would you say,
Here we are?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: here
we are, here we are, here we are.
Word 2
here I am
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use here I am to let people

know where you are. Say it with me: here
I am. Here I am means you are at a specic
place. When your friend looks for you, stand
up and say, Here I am.
2. En espaol, here I am quiere decir aqu
estoy. Se usa para decir dnde ests. Cuando
te busca un amigo, ponte de pie y dile,
Aqu estoy.
3. This picture shows the phrase here I am. It
shows a girl peeking over an umbrella. She
is saying, Here I am.
4. I am going to describe some situations.

Pretend you are in the situation. Say, Here I
am, if that is what you might say. If not, say
nothing.
Three friends come to a party. They open the
door and they say
.
You go to your friends house. You walk in and
say
.
You are sitting at the computer. Your teacher
calls out, Where are you? You stand up and
say
.
5. Answer each question yes or no.
If your friends are looking for you, would you
say, Here I am?
If you and your friends walk into a store,
would you say, Here I am?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: here
I am, here I am, here I am.
140
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockdisc/PunchStock. (b) Laurence Mouton/PhotoAlto/Jupiterimages.
Word 3
look at
Word 4
look up
Word 3
look at
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use look at to describe

something we do with our eyes. Say it with
me: look at. Look at means to watch or
stare. When we go to the toy store, I like to
look at all the toys.
2. En espaol, to look at quiere decir mirar u
observar. Cuando vamos a la juguetera me
gusta mirar todos los juguetes.
3. This picture shows the words look at. It shows
two children watching another child who is
working on something. They look at what the
child is doing.
4. Think about what look at means. Im going

to describe some situations. If you think
the person I am talking about is looking at
something, say look at. If not, say nothing.
The boy is watching a play.
The girl is sleeping.
The dog stares at the cat.
We watch the teacher read a book.
5. Im going to say some words. If they mean
look at, clap and say, look at. If not, say
nothing.
stare
watch
view
sleep
see
6. Repeat the words three times with me: look
at, look at, look at.
Word 4
look up
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use look up to describe how we

use our eyes. Say it with me: look up. Look up
means watch something that is higher, raise
your eyes. The teacher asked us to look up at
the board.
2. En espaol, to look up quiere decir mirar
hacia arriba; alzar la vista. La maestra nos
pidi que alzramos la vista para ver bien
el pizarrn.
3. This picture shows the words look up. The
teacher and student are looking up at
something above them. You can see that they
are looking up because their heads and eyes
are raised.
4. Lets look up at different parts of the room.

Lets look up at the top of the board. Now
lets look up at the ag. Now lets look up at
the ceiling.
5. Im going to look in different directions. Raise
your hand whenever you see me look up.
(Look up, down, to the right, and left several
times. Have children take turns looking in
different directions as well.)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: look
up, look up, look up.
142
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Sean Justice/Corbis.
clap, sing, whine,

quack, cry, laugh
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 2
Smile, Mike!
clap
sing
whine
quack
cry
laugh
ROUTINE
143
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Getty Images. (tc) Digital Vision/Getty Images. (tr) Ryan Smith/Somos/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Alley Cat Productions/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (bm) VStock LLC/age fotostock. (br) Blend Images/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
complicated
Unit 3 Week 3 Masks! Masks! Masks!
Word 2
original
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
complicated
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is complicated. Say

it with me: complicated. Complicated means
made up of many parts. A puzzle that has
many pieces is complicated. A puzzle with
only two pieces is not complicated.
2. En espaol, complicated quiere decir que
tiene muchas partes o piezas, difcil de
entender, complicado. Un rompecabezas
de muchas piezas es complicado. Uno de dos
piezas es fcil, no es complicado.
3. Complicated in English and complicado in
languages.
word complicated. (Point to the rug in the
photo.) This rug has many different drawings
in the pattern. The design on the rug is
complicated. If the rug were just one color,
the design would not be complicated.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is original. Say

it with me: original. Original means the rst
one or one of a kind. The rst school you
went to was your original school. The country
where you were born is your original country.
2. En espaol, original quiere decir el primero
o el nico, original. El primer colegio al que
fuiste fue tu colegio original. El pas donde
naciste es tu pas original.
3. Original in English and original in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows an
original work. (Point to the painting in the
photo.) This girl painted this picture. She
didnt copy it. This picture has never been
painted before. It is an original picture.
146
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Wetzel & Company. (b) Digital Vision/Alistair Berg/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
5. Lets play follow the leader. Ill show you
a complicated move, then you follow.
(Demonstrate a complicated series of
movements such as clapping, jumping, and
waving with one hand then the other.)
6. Lets make a complicated design on a sheet
of paper. (Provide crayons and paper for
children.) Then share your complicated
designs with the class.
7. Now lets say complicated together three
more times: complicated, complicated,
complicated.
Word 2
original
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner about something you made
that is original. (Examples include: pictures,
paintings, stories)
6. Work with your partner to make up an
original dance, song, or rhyme. Then perform
your original creation for the class.
7. Now lets say original together three more
times: original, original, original.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
talented
Word 4
astonishing
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
talented
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is talented. Say

it with me: talented. Talented means being
very good at doing a certain thing, skillful.
Some people are talented at singing. They
sing well. Some people are talented in math.
They are very good at math.
2. En espaol, talented quiere decir muy bueno
haciendo algo, dotado. Algunas personas
estn dotadas para el canto. Cantan muy bien.
Otra son dotadas en las matemticas. Son muy
buenos para las matemticas.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows a
talented person. (Point to the boy playing
the violin in the photo.) This boy can play the
violin. He knows how to play the violin well.
He is talented.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is astonishing.

Say it with me: astonishing. Astonishing
means surprising, not expected. It would
be astonishing if a baby knew how to read
a book. It would also be astonishing if it
snowed in the summer.
2. En espaol, astonishing quiere decir
sorprendente, no esperado, asombrante.
Sera asombrante ver a un beb leer o ver
nieve en el verano.
something astonishing. (Point to the sky in the
photo.) Look at the sky. This is not a typical
color for the sky. It is astonishing to see these
lights in the sky.
148
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Radius/PunchStock. (b) Tom Walker/Stone/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner what you are talented in.
What can you do well? Use the sentence
frame: I am talented in
.
5. Talk with your partner about someone you
saw who is talented. Tell how you could tell
that person was talented.
6. Now lets say talented together three more
times: talented, talented, talented.
Word 4
astonishing
PARTNER TALK
4. Think about something that surprised you in
a movie or TV show. Tell your partner about
something astonishing you saw in the show.
5. Think about what kind of food you like
and what kind you do not like. Talk to your
partner about what would be astonishing for
you to eat. Use the sentence frame: If I ate
it would be astonishing.
6. Now lets say astonishing together three more
times: astonishing, astonishing, astonishing.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
continue
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
continue
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is continue. Say

it with me: continue. To continue means to
keep going, to not stop. You continue to
learn new things in school. If you like a story,
you continue to read it until the end.
2. En espaol, to continue quiere decir seguir
haciendo algo, no parar, continuar.Si te gusta
un libro, continas leyndolo hasta su n.
3. To continue in English and continuar in
languages.
something that continues. (Point to the winding
road in the photo.) This road continues on for a
long way. We cannot see the end of the road.
It continues around the turn.
150
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. Lets clap our hands. Lets continue until I say
stop.
6. Lets take turns marching around the room.
Continue to march until someone taps you on
the shoulder. (Have children march, one at a
time. Choose a child to tap the marcher on the
shoulder and continue to march until he or
she is tapped.)
7. Now lets say continue together three more
times: continue, continue, continue.
Word 1
make out of
Word 2
make up
Word 1
make out of
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use make out of to tell about

what we do with different kinds of materials.
Say it with me: make out of. Make out of
means to create something from a specic
material. We can make model airplanes out
of plastic.
2. En espaol, to make out of quiere decir crear
o armar algo de un material especco.
Modemos armar aviones de plstico.
3. This picture shows the words make out of.
Look what the boy can make out of clay.
What can you make out of clay?
4. (Point to a wooden object, such as a chair and

say, This chair is made out of wood.) Tell
your partner about other things that we can
make out of wood. Use the sentence: We can
make
out of wood.
5. Talk with your partner about different things
you have made in art class or at home. What
did you make? What did you make them
out of? (Examples include: decorations out
of paper, bowls out of clay, bracelets out of
beads)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: make
out of, make out of, make out of.
Word 2
make up
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use make up to tell about

something we create. Say it with me: make
up. Make up means to create or invent.
The class will make up a new display for the
bulleting board.
2. En espaol, to make up quiere decir montar,
crear o inventar. La clase va a montar una
presentacin en el tablero de anuncios.
3. This picture shows the words make up. It
shows that this girl was able to make up her
own decoration.
4. Look back at the picture. Talk to your partner

about what art supplies the girl used to make
up her decoration. Then tell how you would
make up a decoration of your own.
5. Ask and answer yes or no questions about
what you and your partner have made up. Use
this sentence frame for your questions: Did
you ever make up your own
?
(Examples include: song, play, sentence,
picture, dance, story)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: make
up, make up, make up.
152
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Creatas/PunchStock.
Word 3
put on
Word 4
put aside
Word 3
put on
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use put on to tell what we do

with clothes. Say it with me: put on. Put on
means to wear something. I put on my coat
before I went outside.
2. En espaol, to put on quiere decir ponerse
ropa. Me pongo el abrigo antes de salir.
3. This picture shows the words put on. The
children put on costumes for the school play.
This girl puts on lipstick, too.
4. Ill describe some actions. Say, You put it

on, if you think I did. Say, You did not put it
on, if I didnt.
I placed my hat on my head.
I wore a new jacket to school.
I put my shirt in the drawer.
I tied my scarf around my neck.
5. Im going to say some items and then ask a
question. Answer yes or no.
A shoe: Can you put it on?
A watch: Can you put it on?
A house: Can you put it on?
A lion: Can you put it on?
A helmet: Can you put it on?
6. Repeat the words three times with me: put it
on, put it on, put it on.
Word 4
put aside
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use put aside to tell what we

do if we do not need something right away.
Say it with me: put aside. Put aside means to
place away from or to take something and
put it in another place. If you do not need to
write, you can put aside your pencil.
2. En espaol, to put aside quiere decir poner
a un lado; poner en un lugar distinto. Si no
vas a escribir nada, puedes poner tu lpiz a
un lado.
3. This picture shows the words put aside. When
you play checkers, you put aside the checker
pieces that you win.
4. Lets pretend we are reading a book. Then

when I stand up, lets put aside our books
and pretend to get ready to write.
5. Pretend you are playing checkers with your
partner. Each time you make a move, pretend
you win one checker. Put aside each checker
you win.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: put
aside, put aside, put aside.
154
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Richard Lewisohn/Getty Images. (b) Daniel Pangbourne/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
tear, paste, pop,

tie, shake, fold
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 3
Masks! Masks! Masks!
tear
paste
pop
tie
shake
fold
ROUTINE
155
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) JupiterImages/Brand X Pictures/Alamy Images. (tc) BananaStock/Alamy Images. (tr) PunchStock.
(bl) Iain Masterton/Alamy Images. (bm) Photodisc/PunchStock. (br) Image Source Black/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
inspire
Unit 3 Week 4 Rose Robot Cleans Up
Word 2
resourceful
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
inspire
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is inspire. Say it

with me: inspire. To inspire means to cause
someone want to do something because of
what you do. A good teacher can inspire
children to work hard in school. People who
are kind inspire others to be kind, too.
2. En espaol, to inspire quiere decir causar que
alguien haga algo por tus acciones, inspirar.
Un buen profesor inspira a los nios de su
clase a que les vaya bien en sus estudios.
3. To inspire in English and inspirar in Spanish
word inspire. (Point to people cleaning up
in the photo.) These people are cleaning up
the land. Their good work can inspire other
people to help clean up, too.
Key Vocabulary
PARTNER TALK
5. Think about people who you admire or like.
Do they inspire you to do something? Tell your
partner about someone who inspires you. Use
this sentence frame:
inspires
me to
.
6. What do you like to do? Do you like to draw?
Do you like to read? Talk with your partner
about how you can inspire someone to do
what you like to do.
7. Now lets say inspire together three more
times: inspire, inspire, inspire.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is resourceful.

Say it with me: resourceful. Resourceful means
good at solving problems. You need to be
resourceful to get in your house if you do not
have the key to the door. That means you need
to gure out a good way to solve the problem.
2. En espaol, resourceful quiere decir que
resuelve problemas fcilmente, ingenioso.
Si pierdes las llaves de tu casa tienes que ser
ingenioso para poder entrar. Es decir, tienes
que pensar cmo entrar a tu casa sin tus
llaves.
3. Now lets look at the resourceful people in
the picture. (Point to the child on the sled in
the photo.) These people had to get this child
back to the house in the storm. They were
resourceful. They worked together to carry
the sled and put the child on top. That was a
great idea.
resourceful
PARTNER TALK
4. Think of a time you had to solve a problem
at home and you were resourceful. Tell your
partner about how you were resourceful.
5. Talk with your partner about when you might
have to be resourceful at school. (Examples
include: forgetting lunch, losing a book)
6. Now lets say resourceful together three more
times: resourceful, resourceful, resourceful.
158
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc/Steve Mason/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
structure
Word 4
create
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
structure
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is structure. Say it

with me: structure. Structure means a building
or something that has been put together with
many parts. You can use blocks to build a
structure. Our school building is a structure.
2. En espaol, structure quiere decir un edicio
o algo compuesto por muchas partes, una
estructura. Podemos usar cubos para
construir una estructura. Nuestro colegio es
una estructura.
3. Structure in English and estructura in Spanish
word structure. (Point to the house in the
photo.) This house is a structure. It is a
colorful structure. What are some things
you see on this structure? (Examples include:
windows, door, roof)
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is create. Say

it with me: create. Create means to make
something that did not exist before. You can
create a picture with paints and paper. You
can even create a mess by not putting away
your toys!
2. En espaol, to create quiere decir hacer algo
que no exista antes, crear. Puedes crear un
dibujo con pintura y papel. Puedes crear un
desorden si no guardas tus juguetes.
3. To create in English and crear in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at what someone created in the
picture. (Point to the handprints in the photo.)
Look at the handprints. A child created them
with her own hand. The handprints did not
exist until the child made them.
160
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Amanda Clement/Getty Images. (b) Mark Karrass/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
5. Talk with your partner about the structure
of our school building. What parts make up
the structure? Does the structure have a roof?
Windows? Doors? Is it tall? Is it big?
6. What is your favorite structure? Is it a
museum you visited? Is it a roller coaster?
Is it your home? Tell your partner. Use the
sentence frame: My favorite structure is
.
7. Now lets say structure together three more
times: structure, structure, structure.
Word 4
create
MOVEMENT
5. (Provide children with several connecting
cubes or different colored blocks.) Lets each
create a structure. Each one will be different
because we will each create an original
structure.
6. (Provide drawing paper and pencil.) Lets each
create our own footprint. (Have children draw
outline of their shoe on paper.)
7. Now lets say create together three more
times: create, create, create.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
hobby
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
hobby
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is hobby. Say it

with me: hobby. A hobby is something you like
to do for fun in your free time. Some people
like to knit for a hobby. They knit scarves and
socks in their free time. Other examples of
hobbies are painting pictures, taking photos,
and collecting things.
2. En espaol, hobby quiere decir lo que
te gusta hacer en tu tiempo libre, un
pasatiempo. Bordar es el pasatiempo de
muchas personas. Bordan bufandas, medias y
otras cosas en su tiempo libre. Pintar, tomar
fotos y coleccionar cosas son otros ejemplos
de pasatiempos.
hobby. (Point to the girl in the photo.) This
girl is making napkin rings from paper. The
girls hobby is making things out of paper. She
likes her hobby and does it to have fun when
she has nished her work.
162
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Chris Lowe/Index Stock Imagery.
PARTNER TALK
4. What do you like to do when you are nished
with your work? What is your hobby? Tell your
partner what your hobby is.
5. Sometimes its fun to try a new hobby. Its fun
to try something you have never done before.
Talk with your partner about a new hobby
you might like to try someday.
6. Now lets say hobby together three more
times: hobby, hobby, hobby.
Word 1
pull down
Word 2
pull back
Word 1
pull down
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use pull down to tell about the

direction we move something. Say it with me:
pull down. Pull down means to drag or yank
something toward the ground. I can pull
down the shade on a window to keep the sun
out of the room.
2. En espaol, to pull down quiere decir halar,
bajar o estirar hacia el suelo. Puedo bajar
la persiana de la ventana para que no entre
el sol.
3. This picture shows the words pull down. The
arrow shows how to pull down the handle of
the re alarm.
4. Ill name some things. If you can pull it down,

say, You can pull it down. If not say, You
cannot pull it down.
a balloon tied to a chair
a cloud in the sky
the string on a ceiling fan
a rock on the ground
5. Ill describe some things I want to do. Repeat
and complete this sentence to tell me what to
do: Pull down the
.
I want to move the string on a light to turn on
the light.
I want to move the handle on the re alarm to
set off the alarm.
I want to get the spider web out of a corner of
the ceiling.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: pull
down, pull down, pull down.
Word 2
pull back
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use pull back to tell about

moving something in a certain direction. Say
it with me: pull back. Pull back means to
yank something in the opposite direction from
forward. The boy started to cross the street,
but his father pulled him back to stop him.
2. En espaol, to pull back quiere decir halar o
estirar hacia atrs. El nio empez a cruzar la
calle, pero su pap lo hal para detenerlo.
3. This picture shows the words pull back. It
shows children playing a game of tug-of-war.
In tug-of-war each team pulls back on the rope.
4. Lets put our chairs under our desks or tables.

Now lets pull back the chairs and sit on them.
5. Lets work with our partner. Pretend you are
both having a tug-of-war like the children in
the picture. Lets show how we will each pull
back on the rope.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: pull
back, pull back, pull back.
164
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) rob casey/Alamy Images. (b) Image Source/PunchStock.
Word 3
left over
Word 4
left out
Word 3
left over
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use left over to tell about things

that are extra. Say it with me: left over. Left
over means remained. After I ate breakfast,
there was some cereal left over.
2. En espaol, left over quiere decir que sobra.
Despus del desayuno, sobraba cereal.
3. This picture shows the words left over. The
boys are eating some pizza. The rest of the
pizza is left over.
4. I will describe some situations. Say, left over

if there is something left over. If not, say
nothing.
I used some of the chalk in a box. There is still
one more piece of chalk in the box.
I used all of the paper in the pack.
I put all of the children into groups of three.
There is one more child who is not in any of
the groups.
I gave out three of the four boxes of juice in
the pack.
5. I will ask some questions. Answer each one
yes or no.
Matt drank some of the milk in the box. Is
there any milk left over?
The dog ate all of the food in its dish. Is there
any food left over?
Maris gave away some of her stickers. Does
she have any stickers left over?
6. Repeat the words three times with me: left
over, left over, left over.
Word 4
left out
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use left out to tell about not

being included. Say it with me: left out. Left
out means not included, not part of. The
dog was left out of the bedroom.
2. En espaol, left out quiere decir excluido,
no permitir la entrada. El perro no est
permitido en el cuarto.
3. This picture shows the words left out. The
picture shows a boy who is left out of a game.
He watches sadly as the others play baseball.
4. Look back at the picture. Talk with your

partner about how the boy feels being left
out. Use the words left out to talk about
the boy.
5. Tell your partner about a time you were left
out. Tell why you were left out and how you
felt. (Examples include: being left out of a
team, a game, a room, a party)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: left
out, left out, left out.
166
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Jupiterimages/Brand X Pictures/Alamy Images. (b) D. Falconer/PhotoLink/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 4
Rose Robot Cleans Up
toothbrush, toothpaste,
shoes, sneakers, coat, vest
toothbrush
toothpaste
shoes
sneakers
coat
vest
ROUTINE
167
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images. (tc) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (tr) C Squared Studios/Photodisc/Getty Images.
(bl) Siede Preis/PhotoDisc. (bm) Corbis. (br) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Ken Cavanagh.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
culture
Word 2
custom
Unit 3 Week 5 Kids Have Fun
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
culture
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is culture. Say it with

me: culture. Culture means the traditions,
beliefs, and habits of a group of people. People
from the same culture enjoy the same kinds of
food, music and celebrations.
2. En espaol, culture quiere decir las
tradiciones, creencias y costumbres de un
grupo de personas; cultura. Las personas
de una misma cultura disfrutan de la misma
comida, msica y celebraciones.
3. Culture in English and cultura in Spanish are
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is custom. Say it

with me: custom. Custom means something
people always do, a tradition. It is a custom to
clap when you like a show. In some countries it
is a custom to bow when you meet someone.
2. En espaol, custom quiere decir algo que
se hace a menudo, tradicin, costumbre.
Aplaudir cuando te ha gustado una
presentacin es una costumbre. En algunos
pases hay la costumbre de inclinarse cuando
uno conoce a alguien.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows a custom.
(Point to the children waving ags in the
photo.) See how the children are waving ags.
It is a custom to wave ags in a parade. What
are some other customs we have when we see
the American ag? (Examples include: say the
pledge, salute, hold hand over heart, stand)
170
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) DAJ/Getty Images. (b) Ariel Skelley/Blend Images/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
different culture. (Point to the people dancing
in the photo.) These people are dancing at
a Cinco de Mayo festival. Cinco de Mayo is
a holiday in the Mexican culture. On this
holiday, some place celebrate with Mexican
food, music, and dancing.
5. Talk with your partner about how families in
the United States celebrate Thanksgiving Day.
What foods are usually served on this holiday?
6. We know that holidays are part of a culture.
Talk with your partner about another holiday
you know about. How do people celebrate
that holiday? What foods, music, or activities
are part of their culture?
7. Now lets say culture together three more
times: culture, culture, culture.
Word 2
custom
MOVEMENT
4. Shaking hands is a custom we have when we
meet someone. Lets act out that custom with
a partner.
5. Think about the customs we follow on our
birthday. What do we do with candles? (Put
them on the cake, light them, and blow them
out). Lets act out that custom. Lets pretend
to blow out our birthday candles.
6. Now lets say custom together three more
times: custom, custom, custom.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
language
Word 4
similar
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
language
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is language.

Say it with me: language. Language means
the words people use to talk to each other.
Different languages are spoken in different
countries. Some people speak one language.
Some people speak more than one language.
Right now I am speaking English.
2. En espaol, language quiere decir las palabras
que usa un grupo de personas para hablar,
el lenguaje. En pases distintos se hablan
lenguajes distintos. Algunas personas slo saben
un lenguaje. Algunas otras hablan ms de uno.
Ahora les estoy hablando en ingls, el lenguaje
que hablamos aqu.
3. Language in English and lenguaje in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is similar. Say it

with me: similar. Similar means almost alike,
close to being the same, but not exactly.
(Hold up two red crayons.) These crayons are
similar. They are almost the same. One is a
little sharper than the other, but they are the
same color.
2. En espaol, similar quiere decir parecido
a algo pero no igual, semejante, similar.
(Muestre dos creyones rojos.) Estos dos
creyones son similares. Aunque son del mismo
color, uno de ellos es ms puntudo que el
otro.
3. Similar in English and similar in Spanish are
172
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Scott Speakes/Corbis. (b) Bob Jacobson/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
word language. (Point to the words in the
photo.) These words show how to say the
name of the picture in two languages. In
English we say dog. In Spanish we say perro.
5. Look around the room. Tell your partner some
things you see in as many languages as you
can. Talk about what language you used to
name the things.
6. Tell your partner what languages you have
heard people speak. Use this sentence frame:
I have heard people speak these languages:
.
7. Now lets say language together three more
times: language, language, language.
Word 4
similar
MOVEMENT
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows two
similar things. (Point to the twins in the photo.)
These girls are twins. Their faces are similar.
They are close to being the same, but they are
two different people, so they are not exactly
the same. What else is similar in this picture?
(Examples include: the girls hair, their clothes)
5. When I say, Surprise! lets all look surprised.
We can make faces and gestures that are
similar. Ready, Surprise!
6. Ill hold up an object. Then you hold up a
similar object. (Hold up several common
classroom objects, such as a book, a pencil, a
marker, and a notebook.)
7. Now lets say similar together three more
times: similar, similar, similar.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
skill
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
skill
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is skill. Say it

with me: skill. Skill means something you are
good at, a talent. It takes skill to play the
piano. You use your catching skills when you
play baseball and football.
2. En espaol, skill quiere decir algo que puedes
hacer, una aptitud, capacidad o habilidad.
Se necesitan habilidades especiales para tocar
el piano. Tienes que usar tus habilidades para
coger cosas cuando juegas bisbol o ftbol
americano.
someones skills. (Point to the ballerina in the
photo.) This girl is using her skills to dance.
Some skills she uses are balancing, jumping,
and being graceful.
174
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Thomas Barwick/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner what skills you use when you
play your favorite sport.
5. Think about what you want to be when you
grow up. Talk to your partner about what
kinds of skills you will need. (Examples include:
basketball player: fast, good aim, strong, good
catcher)
6. Now lets say skill together three more times:
skill, skill, skill.
Word 1
back home
Unit 3 Week 5 Kids Have Fun!
Word 2
back at the house
Word 1
back home
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use back home to talk about

where we live. Say it with me: back home.
Back home means in your home, on your
land, or in your city or town. After a long
trip, it is nice to go back home.
2. En espaol, back home quiere decir en casa;
en tu tierra; en tu ciudad o pueblo. Despus
de un largo viaje, qu bonito es regresar
a casa.
3. This picture shows the words back home. See
the grandmother and grandfather sitting in
front of their home. (Point to them in the
picture.) Their daughter has come back home
for a visit. She brought her husband and
children back home with her.
4. Talk to your partner about something you

know who came back home for a visit. Who
was it? Where does that person live? Why did
he or she come back home?
5. Tell your partner about a time you wanted
to go back home. Where were you? Why did
you want to go back home? Use the sentence
frame: I wanted to go back home because
.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: back
home, back home, back home.
Word 2
back at the house
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use back at the house to talk

about a particular place. Say it with me: back
at the house. Back at the house means in
a building where someone lives. I left my
homework back at the house.
2. En espaol, back at the house quiere decir
all en mi casa en el edicio donde vivo.
Olvid mi tarea en mi casa.
3. This picture shows the words back at the
house. It shows a boy walking down a path.
He is going home after school. His mother is
waiting for him back at the house.
4. I will say some sentence starters. Repeat each

one and complete the sentence with the
words back at the house.
I forgot my book bag
.
My friends are at a party
.
After school, we will all meet
.
5. I will ask some questions. Answer yes
or no.
I am taking my dog for a walk. Is he back at
the house?
I left my cat sleeping on a chair. Is she back
at the house?
6. Repeat the words three times with me: back
at the house, back at the house, back at the
house.
176
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) ER Productions/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Word 3
play with
Unit 3 Week 5 Kids Have Fun!
Word 4
play in
Word 3
play with
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use play with to tell about

things we have fun with. Say it with me: play
with. Play with means to use things to have
fun. I like to play with blocks.
2. En espaol, to play with quiere decir jugar
con algo. Me gusta jugar con bloques.
3. This picture shows the words play with. It
shows a boy who likes to play with his truck.
4. Tell your partner what your favorite thing

is to play with. Use the sentence starter: My
favorite thing to play with is
.
5. Pretend that you and your partner are
visiting each other. Ask each other if you
can play with the others toys. Then answer
the question. Use these question and answer
starters:
May I play with your
.
Yes, you may play with my
.
6. Repeat the words three times with me: play
with, play with, play with.
Word 4
play in
PARTNER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use play in to tell about what

we might have fun in. Say it with me: play
in. Play in means to have fun in a specic
place. My friend likes to play in the sand at
the beach.
2. En espaol, to play in quiere decir jugar en un
lugar especco. A mi amigo le gusta jugar
en la arena de la playa.
3. This picture shows the words play in. The girl
likes to play in the sand. She is having fun
building sandcastles.
4. Lets use this sentence frame to tell where we

are playing. We are playing in
.
Tell us how we might nish the sentence.
Then we will say the sentence together.
(Examples include: the house, the park, the
yard, the sand)
5. Ill name some places. If you can play in a
place say, You can play in it. If not say,
You cannot play in it.
a swimming pool
the sun
a playground
a museum
6. Repeat the words three times with me: play in,
play in, play in.
178
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Jill Braaten/McGraw-Hill Companies. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 5
Kids Have Fun!
hula hoop, jump rope,

balloon, puzzle, skate, slide
hula hoop
jump rope
balloon
puzzle
skate
slide
ROUTINE
179
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Purestock/SuperStock. (tc) Nicole Katano/age fotostock. (tr) PunchStock.
(bl) TRBfoto/Getty Images/Getty Images. (bm) C Squared Studios/Photodisc/Getty Images. (br) BananaStock/Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
borrow
Unit 4 Week 1 Drakes Tail
Word 2
trip
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
borrow
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is borrow. Say it

with me: borrow. To borrow means to use
something that belongs to someone else and
then give it back. If you forget your pencil,
you can borrow one from a classmate, use
it, and then give it back. When you borrow
something, you must take care of it because it
belongs to someone else.
2. En espaol, to borrow quiere decir pedir
prestado; usar algo ajeno y devolverlo
despus. Si olvidas tu lpiz, puedes pedirle
prestado uno a tu compaero y despus
devolvrselo. Hay que cuidar lo que uno pide
prestado, pues es ajeno.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is trip. Say

it with me: trip. Trip means a journey, an
outing, or a visit. If you travel from one place
to another, you take a trip. You might take a
long trip when you go on vacation.
2. En espaol, trip quiere decir viaje, excursin,
visita. Si viajas de un lugar a otro, haces un
viaje. Podras hacer un viaje largo cuando te
vas de vacaciones.
word trip. (Point to the people in the photo.)
This family went on a trip. They took a trip
together to go skiing.
182
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Image Source/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
word borrow. (Point to the girl in the photo.)
This girl borrowed this book from the library.
She will read the book and then bring it back
to the library.
4. Take turns asking each other to borrow
something. Borrow it, use it, and return it.
Use the sentence frame: May I borrow your
Remember to say thank you
when your borrow the item.
5. Talk about when you might need to borrow
something from a friend or a family member.
Tell what you would need to borrow.
6. Now lets say borrow together three more
times: borrow, borrow, borrow.
Word 2
trip
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner where you would like to take
a trip. How would you travel there? By car?
By plane?
5. Talk to your partner about a trip you went on.
It can be a short or long trip. Where did you
go? How did you travel? Who traveled with
you?
6. Now lets say trip together three more times:
trip, trip, trip.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
encourage
Word 4
friendship
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
encourage
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is encourage. Say

it with me: encourage. To encourage means
to give someone hope or help someone do
something that is difcult for them. A coach
encourages the team to play their best even if
they are losing. Parents encourage their baby
to learn to walk.
2. En espaol, to encourage quiere decir
animar, entusiasmar, darle esperanzas a
alguien, ayudar a alguien a realizar algo
que se le diculta. Un entrenador anima a
su equipo a dar lo mejor de s aunque vaya
perdiendo. Los padres animan a su beb a dar
sus primeros pasos.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is friendship. Say

it with me: friendship. Friendship means the
connection between friends. People who are
part of a friendship enjoy being together. You
can have more than one friendship. You can be
friends with many people.
2. En espaol, friendship quiere decir amistad,
la relacin entre dos amigos. Las personas
que comparten una amistad disfrutan de su
compaa. Puedes tener varias amistades.
Puedes ser amigo o amiga de muchas personas.
word friendship. (Point to the friends in the
photo.) See these children. They are friends.
They like each other. What are they doing
that shows their friendship? (Examples
include: hugging each other, smiling together)
184
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Riser/Jenny Acheson/Getty Images. (b) Bananastock/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
word encourage. (Point to woman in the
photo.) This mom encourages her child to try
to ride the bike. When you dont know how to
do something it helps if someone encourages
you to keep trying.
4. Tell your partner about a time someone
encouraged you to do something. Did you do it?
5. Suppose a friend was afraid to learn how to
ride a bike. What would you say to encourage
him or her? Tell your partner how you would
encourage your friend.
6. Now lets say encourage together three more
times: encourage, encourage, encourage.
Word 4
friendship
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a friendship you
have with someone. What do you like to do
together?
5. Think about why friendship is important.
Talk to your partner about it. Use the
sentence frame: Friendship is important
because
.
6. Now lets say friendship together three more
times: friendship, friendship, friendship.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
relationship
Word 6
rely
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
relationship
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is relationship. Say it

with me: relationship. Relationship means the
connection between two or more people, such
as how people in a family are connected.
You have a relationship, or special connection,
with people in your family. Children have a
strong relationship with their parents.
2. En espaol, relationship quiere decir la relacin
o conexin entre dos o ms personas, como la
que une a los miembros de una familia. Tienes
una relacin, o conexin especial, con los
miembros de tu familia. Los nios tienen una
relacin estrecha con sus padres.
3. Relationship in English and relacin in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is rely Say it

with me: rely. To rely means to count on
someone to help you. We rely on the police
to help us if we are in trouble. We rely on
doctors to help us get well if we are ill.
2. En espaol, to rely quiere decir contar con
alguien para que te apoye o ayude. Contamos
con la polica si estamos en apuros. Contamos
con los doctores cuando estamos enfermos.
word rely. (Point to the patient and health
care worker in the photo.) This man is in the
hospital. He relies on the health care workers
to help him get well.
186
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Blend Images/Alamy Images. (b) Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
word relationship. (Point to the family in
the photo.) These people are a family. How
can you tell they have a close relationship?
(Examples include: they are hugging, they are
happy to be with each other)
5. Tell your partner about a close relationship
you have with someone. Use the sentence
frame: I have a close relationship with
.
6. Talk to your partner about people who have
good relationships. What kinds of things do
they do together? [Examples include: play
together, help each other, work together]
7. Now lets say relationship together three more
times: relationship, relationship, relationship.
Word 6
rely
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner who you rely on to help
you when you do not understand your school
work.
5. Talk to your partner about some things your
family relies on you to do. Do they rely on you
to take care of your room? to help with work
around the house? to do your school work?
6. Now lets say rely together three more times:
rely, rely, rely.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
suggest
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
suggest
TEACHER TALK
Point to the Word 7 image on the opposite side for
children to view.
1. One word in the selection is suggest. Say it

with me: suggest. To suggest means to give
your advice about how or what to do, to offer
a different choice. If someone has a problem
you might suggest how he or she can solve it.
2. En espaol, to suggest quiere decir dar sus
consejos sobre cmo o qu hacer, ofrecer una
opcin diferente, sugerir. Si alguien tiene un
problema, le podris sugerir una manera de
solucionarlo.
3. To suggest in English and sugerir in Spanish
188
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) 100 image/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
word suggest. (Point to the teacher in the
photo.) The teacher suggests a way to help
the boy read. She might suggest he look at
the picture to help him read the words.
5. Talk with your partner about dinner. Suggest
some healthy foods you might want to eat.
Use the sentence frame: I suggest you eat
for dinner.
6. Talk to your partner about some books or
movies you like. Suggest what book your
partner should read or what movie your
partner should see.
7. Now lets say suggest together three more
times: suggest, suggest, suggest.
Word 1
take care of
Word 2
take away from
Word 1
take care of
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use take care of to tell about

what some people do for others. Say it with
me: take care of. Take care of means to look
after or watch over someone or something.
Ana knows how to take care of her new
puppy. She gives it food and water and takes
it for a walk every day.
2. En espaol, to take care of quiere decir
cuidar una cosa o a una persona. Ana sabe
cuidar a su perrito. Le da comida y agua. Lo
saca a pasear todos los das.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase take
care of. It shows one way this mother takes
care of her daughter. She takes care of her
daughter by brushing her hair.
4. I am going to describe some situations. If

you think I am taking care of something, say
You are taking care of it. If not, dont say
anything.
I am feeding my cat.
I am reading a book.
I am giving my dog a bath.
I am ghting with my little brother.
5. Now I am going to say some sentences.
Repeat the sentences. Replace the word help
with take care of.
The big sister will help her baby brother.
The zookeepers help the animals in the zoo.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: take
care of, take care of, take care of.
Word 2
take away from
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use take away from to tell

what we do when we remove something. Say
it with me: take away from. Take away from
means to remove something from where it
is to another place. I had to take my shoe
away from the dog. He was chewing on it and
I didnt want him to ruin it!
2. En espaol, to take away from quiere decir
quitar una cosa de un lugar y ponerlo en
otro lugar. Le tuve que quitar mi zapato al
perro. Lo estaba mordiendo y no quera que lo
arruinara.
away from. The boy was looking through the
library shelves for the book he wants to check
out. The boy is taking the book away from
the shelf.
4. I am going to ask some questions. Answer

each yes or no.
Should you take a blanket away from a bed
when it is time to sleep?
Should a grown-up take matches away from a
child?
Should you take a bottle away from a baby
when it is time to drink?
the same as take away from say take away
from. If not, say nothing.
remove
move from one place to another
get something a put it somewhere else
hold on to
away from, take away from, take away from.
190
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Tanya Constantine/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) Comstock/PunchStock.
Word 3
take off
Word 4
take time
Word 3
take off
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the phrase take off to talk

about what we do when we stop working
for a while. Say it with me: take off. Take off
means to go away on a vacation, to take
some time away from work. In the summer
I like to take off and go to the beach.
2. En espaol, to take off quiere decir tomar
un tiempo libre. Cuando te tomas un tiempo
libre, te vas de vacaciones o descansas. En el
verano me gusta tomar un tiempo libre para ir
a la playa.
off. It shows a family getting ready to go on
vacation. When people take off from work
and school they often go on vacation. Do you?
4. Im going to describe what some people are

doing. Say take off if they are taking a
break from school or work. Say nothing if they
are not.
Henry is packing his car and going to the lake.
Juan is sitting at his desk doing his homework.
Sal didnt go to work today. Hes going
camping instead.
Katalina is taking a trip to visit her
grandmother.
5. After I tell about each person repeat and
complete this sentence: He (or she) is taking
off from
.
The teacher is leaving school. He is going on
a trip.
Maria is not going to work tomorrow. She is
going on vacation.
Mr. Walters is not going to his job for two
days. He is ill and has to stay home.
off, take off, take off.
Word 4
take time
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use take time to talk about

something that happens slowly. Say it with
me: take time. Take time means to do
something slowly. It takes time for a tree
to grow.
2. En espaol, to take time quiere decir tomar
tiempo. Un rbol toma tiempo para crecer.
time. It shows a seedling, or a baby plant.
It will take time for this seedling to grow.
It will grow slowly.
4. I am going to name some things. If they

happen slowly, say takes time. If not say,
does not take time.
a child grows to be an adult
a carpenter builds a house
a boy turns on the light
a puppy grows to be a dog
5. I am going to ask questions. Answer yes or
no.
Do you think it takes time for an artist to make
a painting look beautiful?
Does it take time for you to decide what to
play at recess?
Does it take time for a child to learn to read
well?
time, take time, take time.
192
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (b) Siede Preis/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 1
Drakes Tail
work, decide, practice,

share, explore, learn
work
decide
practice
share
explore
learn
ROUTINE
193
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Eric Audras/PictureQuest. (tc) Jupiterimages/Pixland/Alamy Images. (tr) mylife photos/Alamy Images.
(bl) David Young-Wolff/Alamy Images. (bm) Thinkstock/Corbis. (br) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
concentrate
Unit 4 Week 2 Gram and Me
Word 2
splendid
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
concentrate
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is concentrate. Say it

with me: concentrate. To concentrate means to
think very hard about something. When you do
try to do something hard, you must concentrate.
If you are trying to put a block on top of a big
block tower, must concentrate on what you are
doing so the blocks do not fall.
2. En espaol, to concentrate quiere decir
concentrarse, poner mucha atencin sin
distraerse. Al hacer algo difcil, hay que
concentrarse. Si ests colocando el ltimo
cubo en lo alto de una torre de cubos te tienes
que concentrar para que la torre no se caiga.
3. To concentrate in English and concentrarse in
Spanish are cognates. They sound almost the same
MOVEMENT
word concentrate. (Point to the girl in the
photo.) This girl is working very hard on her
painting. She wants it to come out just right,
so she will concentrate. She will think hard
about what she is doing.
5. Ill pretend I am teaching you something very
hard to learn. Show me how you concentrate
to understand what I am saying. (Pantomime
teaching a lesson as children act out paying
very close attention.)
6. Lets pretend we have built a tall block
tower. We have to put one more block on
top without making the tower fall. Lets all
concentrate as we put on that last block.
7. Now lets say concentrate together three more
times: concentrate, concentrate, concentrate.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is splendid. Say

it with me: splendid. Splendid means ne,
very enjoyable and beautiful. If you had a
delicious dinner, it was a splendid meal. If you
had a nice vacation, you had a splendid trip. If
you painted a beautiful picture, it is a splendid
painting.
2. En espaol, splendid quiere decir esplndido,
maravilloso, impresionante. Si gozaste de
una cena exquisita, fue una cena esplndida.
Si pasaste unas vacaciones maravillosas,
disfrutaste de un viaje esplndido. Si hiciste un
cuadro bello, pintaste un cuadro esplndido.
3. Splendid in English and esplndido in Spanish
splendid
PARTNER TALK
word splendid. (Point to the scene in the
photo.) This shows a beautiful place in the
country. It looks quiet and enjoyable. This
place is splendid.
5. Tell your partner another word that means
almost the same thing as splendid. (Examples
include: beautiful, great, excellent)
6. Talk to your partner about a splendid visit you
had with someone. Who did you visit? Why
was the visit splendid?
7. Now lets say splendid together three more
times: splendid, splendid, splendid.
196
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Getty Images/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.. (b) Image Ideas/PictureQuest/Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
concerned
Word 4
fortunate
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
concerned
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is concerned. Say

it with me: concerned. Concerned means
worried or caring. People might feel
concerned when they are not sure about a
situation. If someone you know does not look
well, you may feel concerned. You may be
worried that the person is ill.
2. En espaol, concerned quiere decir
preocupado. Alguien puede estar
preocupado si no est seguro de una
situacin. Si un ser querido est enfermo,
seguramente te sentirs preocupado.
word concerned. (Point to the woman in the
photo.) This woman is concerned about her
husband. He is in the hospital. She is worried
about his health.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is fortunate.

Say it with me: fortunate. Fortunate means
lucky, having good things happen in your
life. People who have a loving family are
fortunate. They are lucky to have people who
love them.
2. En espaol, fortunate quiere decir dichoso,
afortunado. Son afortunadas las personas
que cuentan con una familia que las apoya.
3. Fortunate in English and afortunado in Spanish
198
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) UpperCut Images/Getty Images. (b) Blend Images/Ariel Skelley/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you just saw your friend fall off a
bike. Tell each other what you would be
concerned about.
5. Talk with your partner about a time when
people were concerned about you. Why were
they concerned? What did they do to show
they were concerned?
6. Now lets say concerned together three more
times: concerned, concerned, concerned.
Word 4
fortunate
PARTNER TALK
word fortunate. (Point to grandmother in
the photo.) This grandmother is fortunate to
have a loving family. She is lucky to be able to
enjoy cooking with her granddaughter.
5. Tell your partner about something you are
fortunate to have in school.
fortunate to have at home.
7. Now lets say fortunate together three more
times: fortunate, fortunate, fortunate.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
member
Word 6
share
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
member
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is member. Say it

with me: member. Member means a person
who belongs to a group, such as a person in
a family. You are a member of your family.
Anyone in your family is a family member.
2. En espaol, member quiere decir miembro,
persona que pertenece a un grupo. Eres
miembro de una familia. Cada persona que forma
parte de tu familia es un miembro de la familia.
3. Member in English and miembro in Spanish
word member. (Point to the family in the
photo.) This is a family. Each person in this
picture is a member of the family. Which
member of the family is the mother? father?
(Have children point to each family member,
including the children.)
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is share. Say it

with me: share. To share means to let others
have some part of a whole thing. If you give
some of your snack to a friend, you share
your snack. What are some things we share in
school? (Examples include: desk, toys, books,
pencils, crayons)
2. En espaol, to share quiere decir compartir,
dar a otra persona una parte de algo que
tienes. Si le das parte de tu emparedado a
tu amigo, ests compartiendo. Qu otras
cosas compartimos en la escuela? (escritorios,
juguetes, libros, lpices, colores)
200
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner the name of some of your
family members. Tell how each member is
related to you.
6. You can be a member of a family. You can
also be a member of other groups, such as
a member of a class, a team, or a club. Tell
your partner what different groups you are a
member of.
7. Now lets say member together three more
times: member, member, member.
Word 6
share
MOVEMENT
word share. (Point to the tray of snacks in the
photo.) See these snacks. This boy will share
them among the children in class. Everyone
will get some of the snacks on the tray.
4. Lets pretend we are eating a granola bar.
Now lets share some of it with a friend.
5. Lets take out a book and read it. Then you
can share the book with a friend and read it
together.
6. Now lets say share together three more times:
share, share, share.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
trust
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
trust
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is trust. Say it

with me: trust. To trust means to believe
in someone you can rely on. When you let
friends play with your toys, you trust them to
take care of the toys. When you are ill, you
trust a doctor to help you get well.
2. En espaol, to trust quiere decir creer en
alguien en el que se puede ar, conar.
Cuando dejas que tus amigos juegen con tus
juguetes, confas que ellos los van a cuidar,
no los van a daar. Cuando ests enfermo,
confas en que tu doctor te ayudar a
mejorarte.
word trust. (Point to the hands in the photo.)
See the childs hand. This picture shows that
the child trusts the grown-up to take care of
her. When you trust someone, you follow the
person because you believe they will take care
of you.
202
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Gerard Fritz/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about one person you trust.
What do you trust this person to do?
5. Talk with your partner about people in
the community who you trust. Choose one
community worker and talk about what you
trust him or her to do. (Examples include:
police ofcers, reghters, doctors, mail
carriers)
6. Now lets say trust together three more times:
trust, trust, trust.
Word 1
drink up
Word 2
lift up
Word 1
drink up
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use drink up to tell what we do

with drinks. Say it with me: drink up. Drink up
means to nish or gulp all of. Mother said
we have to drink up our milk before we leave
the table.
2. En espaol, to drink up quiere decir bebrselo
todo. Mam dice que debemos bebernos
toda la leche antes de dejar la mesa.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase drink up.
It shows a boy drinking up his juice. When he
drinks up the juice, the glass will be empty.
4. I am going to tell about some drinks I have.

Repeat and complete this sentence after
each thing I name: You can drink up the
.
I have a glass of milk.
I have a bottle of juice.
I have some water.
I have a cup of hot chocolate.
5. Now I am going to describe some situations. If
the situation is about drinking something up,
say drink up. If not, say nothing.
The dog nished all the water in its bowl.
After the race Kevin gulped all of the water in
the bottle.
Mr. Larson used all of the water in the bucket
to wash his car.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: drink
up, drink up, drink up.
Word 2
lift up
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use lift up to talk about putting

something in a higher place. Say it with me:
lift up. Lift up means to move something
up high, to raise up higher. When you climb
stairs you must lift up your feet.
2. En espaol, to lift up quiere decir mover algo
hacia arriba, alzar. Cuando subes las escaleras
tienes que alzar los pies.
3. This picture demonstrates the words lift up. It
shows the platform on a bus that can lift up
a wheelchair. It lifts up the wheelchair so the
person in the wheelchair can get on the bus.
4. Lets all lift up a book. Now lift up a pencil.

Now lets pretend to lift up a heavy bag of
groceries.
5. I will tell you what to lift up. Follow my
directions. Lift up your partners hand. Put
it down. Lift up a notebook. Put it down.
(Continue telling children to lift up other
items they have available to them.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: lift up,
lift up, lift up.
204
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) PhotoAlto/PunchStock (b) John A. Rizzo/Getty Images.
Word 3
together
Word 4
apart
Word 3
together
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use together to tell how we

do things with someone else. Say it with me:
together. Together means with each other.
My friend and I like to play together after
school.
2. En espaol, together quiere decir con otra
persona, juntos. Mi amigo y yo jugamos
juntos despus de clases.
3. This picture demonstrates the word together.
It shows two children looking at books
together. They are probably friends. Its fun to
do things together with friends.
4. Draw a picture together with your partner.

Before you start, talk together about what
you will draw.
5. Tell you partner about some things you do
together with your family. Use this sentence
frame: My family and I
together. (Examples include: eat, clean, go on
trips, read, watch TV)
6. Repeat the word three times with me:
together, together, together.
Word 4
apart
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use apart to describe how far

things are from each other. Say it with me:
apart. Apart means separated by some space,
not close together. We sit apart from each
other when we take a test.
2. En espaol, apart quiere decir separado con
espacio, no junto. Nos sentamos separados
cuando presentamos un examen.
3. This picture demonstrates the word apart. It
shows children sitting apart from each other
as they work at their desks. Right now, they
are not working together. The students are
working alone.
4. I am going to hold up pairs of items. If they

are apart say, apart, if not say, together.
(Hold up pairs of pencils, pens, books,
and chairs showing some apart, and some
together.)
almost the same thing as apart say apart. If
not say nothing.
together
separate
away from
far
close
6. Repeat the word three times with me: apart,
apart, apart.
206
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Gaetano Images Inc./Alamy Images. (b) Greatstock Photographic Library/Alamy Images.
read, celebrate, cook,

stroll, sh, nap
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 2
Gram and Me
read
celebrate
cook
stroll
sh
nap
ROUTINE
207
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Corbis. (tc) Jupiterimages/BananaStock/Alamy Images. (tr) PhotoAlto/PunchStock.
(bl) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (bm) Comstock/PunchStock. (br) Blend Images/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
difficult
Unit 4 Week 3 Csr Chvez
Word 2
ripe
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
difficult
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is difcult. Say

it with me: difcult. Difcult means hard
to do. It is difcult to see in the dark. It is
difcult to hear someone speak when there is
a lot of noise.
2. En espaol, difcult quiere decir difcil, algo
que requiere mucho trabajo para hacerse. Es
difcil ver en la oscuridad. Es difcil escuchar a
alguien cuando hay mucho ruido.
3. Difcult in English and difcil in Spanish are
MOVEMENT
word difcult. (Point to the math problem
in the photo.) See this math problem. It is
difcult. The boy needs the teacher to help
him do this difcult, or hard, problem.
5. Lets pretend to try to open a jar that is
difcult to open because the lid is too tight.
6. Lets pretend there is a balance beam, a thin
board, across the room. It is difcult to walk
on the beam and keep our balance. Lets walk
across the beam and show how difcult it is.
7. Now lets say difcult together three more
times: difcult, difcult, difcult.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is ripe. Say it

with me: ripe. Ripe means fully grown, ready
to eat. You should not each an apple until it
is ripe. A strawberry that is ripe is bright red. It
takes time for fruits to get ripe, or to be ready
to eat, after they have grown.
2. En espaol, ripe quiere decir maduro, en
estado perfecto para recoger o para comer.
No hay que comer una manzana hasta que
est madura. Una fresa madura tiene un color
rojo intenso. La fruta necesita tiempo para
madurar o para estar lista para ser comida,
despus de haber crecido.
ripe
PARTNER TALK
word ripe. (Point to the grapes the photo.) See
these grapes. They are ripe. They are dark and
juicy and ready to eat. We can eat ripe grapes.
4. Draw a picture of a ripe piece of fruit that you
like. Tell your partner what the fruit is and
how it tastes when it is ripe.
5. Talk to your partner about how you know if a
banana is ripe. What does it look and feel like
if it is not ripe? What does it look and feel like
if it is ripe?
6. Now lets say ripe together three more times:
ripe, ripe, ripe.
210
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock/PictureQuest/McGraw-Hill Companies. (b) Image Source/Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
accomplish
Word 4
agree
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
accomplish
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is accomplish. Say

it with me: accomplish. To accomplish means
to do what you tried to do, to nish. If you
try hard to win a game and you win, then you
accomplished what you wanted to do.
2. En espaol, to accomplish quiere decir
cumplir con xito lo que se propone, lograr.
Si tu equipo gana el partido despus de un
gran esfuerzo, entonces ustedes habrn
cumplido lo que se propusieron. Lo lograron!
word accomplish. (Point to airplane in the
photo.) The children worked together to build
this airplane. They accomplished what they
tried to do. The airplane is nished.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell each other about something you
accomplished. What did you try to do? How
did you accomplish it?
5. Pretend you and your partner both want to
make friends with a new student in class.
Take turns telling each other one way to
accomplish this.
6. Now lets say accomplish together three more
times: accomplish, accomplish, accomplish.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is agree. Say it

with me: agree. To agree means to have the
same opinion as someone, to go along with
what they say or think. If you and your friend
both think that pizza tastes good, you agree
with each other.
2. En espaol, to agree quiere decir compartir
la misma opinin que otra persona, estar de
acuerdo. Si tu amigo y t piensan que la
pizza es deliciosa, entonces estn de acuerdo.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows the word
agree. (Point to the people in the photo.) These
business people were sharing ideas about how
to help their business grow. They all shared
ideas, and now they agree on what to do. They
agree with their business plan.
agree
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture of the business people
again. Talk to your partner about how it
shows that they agree. What are the people
doing to show they agree? (Examples include:
smiling at each other, putting their arms
around each other, talking to each other with
happy faces)
5. Complete this sentence and read it aloud: The
best thing to do in school is
.
Then ask your partner if he or she agrees with
you.
6. Now lets say agree together three more
times: agree, agree, agree.
212
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) The Image Bank/Camille Tokerud/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/Flying Colours Ltd/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
argue
Word 6
attempt
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
argue
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is argue. Say it with

me: argue. To argue means to not agree, to
quarrel. People often argue when they do not
share the same feelings about something. If you
like blue and your friend likes red, you might
argue about which color to paint a toy train.
2. En espaol, to argue quiere decir no estar
de acuerdo, discutir. Las personas a veces
discuten cuando no comparten las mismas
ideas. Si a t te gusta el azul y a tu amigo el
rojo, no estarn de acuerdo sobre qu color
usar para pintar un tren de juguete.
argue. (Point to the peoples faces in the photo.)
Look at the faces and hands of these people.
You can see that they do not agree about
something. The man with the airplane tickets
argues with the woman behind the counter.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is attempt. Say

it with me: attempt. To attempt means to
try. When you play baseball, you attempt to
bat the ball. You try hard to score a home run.
2. En espaol, to attempt quiere decir intentar.
Cuando juegas bisbol, intentas darle a la
pelota con el bate. Intentas dar un hit o
anotar una carrera de jonrn.
word attempt. (Point to the boy in the photo.)
This boy is attempting to dunk the ball in the
basket. He is trying to jump high enough to
do this. Do you think he will make it?
214
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source/Corbis. (b) Blend Images/Hill Street Studios/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend to argue with your partner about who
should go rst in a game. Use only your face
and your gestures to act out arguing.
5. (Have children pick their favorite color
from a set of crayons.) Now lets pretend to
argue about which color is better. Use facial
expressions and gestures to argue with a
classmate about the color.
6. Now lets say argue together three more
times: argue, argue, argue.
Word 6
attempt
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a time you attempted
to do something and did it.
5. Now tell your partner about a time you
attempted to do something but could not.
6. Now lets say attempt together three more
times: attempt, attempt, attempt.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
goal
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
goal
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is goal. Say it with

me: goal. Goal means the place where a ball
must go to in order to score points. In soccer,
the goal is the net at the end of the eld. In
football, there are goal posts. If the ball is
kicked between the goal posts, the team scores.
2. En espaol, goal quiere decir portera, o el
lugar en donde tiene que llegar la pelota para
anotar un punto. En el ftbol, la portera
est al nal del campo de juego. En el ftbol
americano, hay postes en la portera. Si la pelota
pasa por estos postes, el equipo anota puntos.
216
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
word goal. (Point to the ball in the net in the
photo.) See the soccer ball in the net. The ball
was kicked into the goal. The team scored a
point.
4. Lets pretend the wastebasket is a goal. Lets
take turns trying to make a goal by throwing
this ball of paper into the basket.
5. Pick a game from the following: soccer,
football, hockey, basketball. Act out making a
goal in the sport you picked.
6. Now lets say goal together three more times:
goal, goal, goal.
Word 1
pick out
Unit 4 Week 3 Csar Chvez
Word 2
pick up
Word 1
pick out
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, pick out means to choose and

take, to select the one you want. Say it with
me: pick out. When I go to the library I pick
out a book I want to read and then I check
it out.
2. En espaol, to pick out quiere decir escoger;
seleccionar el que quieres. Cuando voy a la
biblioteca, escojo el libro que quiero leer y lo
llevo.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase pick out.
It shows a girl picking out a piece of fruit. She
picks out the apple from the bowl. Why do
you think she picked out the apple?
4. Ill tell you about some things I like. Listen.

Then answer the question. Use the sentence:
Pick out the
.
There are some red, blue, and green crayons
in a box. My favorite color is red. Which color
crayon should I pick out?
There is a cucumber, tomato, and carrot on
a plate. I like to eat carrots. Which vegetable
should I pick out?
5. Repeat each sentence. Replace the word
choose with the phrase pick out.
Sandy will choose Erin as her partner.
Justin will choose the biggest slice of pizza.
Emma will choose the red dress.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: pick
out, pick out, pick out.
Word 2
pick up
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, pick up means to lift something

or raise it up. Say it with me: pick up. If I see
trash on the oor, I pick it up and throw it
away.
2. En espaol, to pick up quiere decir levantar
o recoger algo. Si veo basura en el piso, la
recojo y la tiro.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase pick up.
It shows that a magnet can pick up lots of
safety pins at once. What else could a magnet
pick up?
4. Im going to ask you some questions. Answer

yes or no.
Can you pick up a shoe?
Can you pick up a book?
Can you pick up a farm?
Can you pick up a toy?
5. I am going to describe some actions. If you
think I am picking something up say, You are
picking it up. If not say, You are not picking
it up.
I am lifting a chair off the oor.
I am taking a cup from the saucer and putting
it to my mouth to drink.
I am dropping my book on the oor.
I am taking my backpack from my chair and
putting it on my back.
up, pick up, pick up.
218
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Ken Cavanagh, photographer.
Word 3
better
Unit 4 Week 3 Csar Chvez
Word 4
best
Word 3
better
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use better to compare two

things. Say it with me: better. Better means
ner than or more likeable in some way than
another. My new bike is better than my old
bike. My old bike was broken, but my new
bike works great. Thats why its better.
2. En espaol, better quiere decir mejor que
otra cosa. Mi bicicleta nueva es mejor que mi
bicicleta vieja. Mi bici vieja ya no serva, pero
mi bici nueva funciona de maravilla. Por eso es
mejor.
3. This picture demonstrates the word better.
It shows all kinds of healthy fruits. Fruits are
better for you than candy. Which do you
like better, apples or grapes? Bananas or
strawberries?
4. Tell your partner about two stories you read.

Then tell which one you liked better and why.
5. Which season do you like better, winter or
summer? Tell your partner. Talk about why.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: better,
better, better.
Word 4
best
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use best to compare more than

two things. Say it with me: best. Best means
nest, superior or more likeable in some
way than all others. My new bike is the best
present I ever got.
2. En espaol, best quiere decir mejor que
cualquier otra cosa; superior a todos. Mi
bicicleta es el mejor regalo que jams he
recibido.
3. This picture demonstrates the word best. Look
at the girl. (Point to the girl.) She is holding a
bunch of grapes. She is smiling because the
grapes she holds are the best grapes she could
nd. She picked the biggest, ripest, juiciest
grapes she could nd.
4. Tell your partner about the best movie you

ever saw. Then tell why you think it is the
best.
5. Which is your best subject in school? Tell your
partner. Talk about why.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: best,
best, best.
220
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 3
Csar Chvez
grape, peach, banana,

tomato, lemon, orange
grape
peach
banana
tomato
lemon
orange
ROUTINE
221
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/PunchStock. (tc) Image Source Black/Jupiterimages. (tr) Iconotec/Alamy Images.
(bl) Danilo Calilung/Corbis. (bm) Image Source Black/Jupiterimages. (br) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
perhaps
Unit 4 Week 4 Frog and Toad: The Kite
Word 2
meadow
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
perhaps
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is perhaps. Say it

with me: perhaps. Perhaps means maybe or
might happen. If you think it might snow,
but you are not sure you can say, Perhaps it
will snow.
2. En espaol, perhaps quiere decir quizs, tal
vez. Si piensas que va a nevar, pero no ests
seguro, puedes decir: Quizs va a nevar.
perhaps. (Point to the sky in the photo.) See all
the dark clouds in the sky. Since it looks like it
might rain, we can say, Perhaps it will rain.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is meadow.

Say it with me: meadow. Meadow means
a large area of land covered with grass, a
grass-covered eld. Cows like eat the grass
in a meadow. A meadow can have low hills
covered with grass.
2. En espaol, meadow quiere decir pradera,
terreno grande y llano cubierto de pasto. Las
vacas comen el pasto de la pradera. Una pradera
puede tener colinas cubiertas de pasto.
word meadow. (Point to the meadow in the
photo.) This is a meadow. It is a large area
of grassy land. There are no buildings on the
meadow, just grass.
224
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) L. Clarke/Corbis. (b) Masterfile.
PARTNER TALK
4. Think about what you might do after school
today. Tell your partner. Use the word perhaps
in your sentence.
5. Look at the weather outside today. Talk to
your partner about what the weather might
be like tomorrow. Use the word perhaps to
talk about what tomorrows weather might be
like.
6. Now lets say perhaps together three more
times: perhaps, perhaps, perhaps.
Word 2
meadow
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture of the meadow with your
partner. Talk about what you would like to do
if you were in the meadow. (Examples include:
run, lie in the sun, play games)
5. Work with your partner to name as many
words as you can that tell about the meadow.
(Examples include: big, green, grassy, eld,
open)
6. Now lets say meadow together three more
times: meadow, meadow, meadow.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
approach
Word 4
quarrel
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
approach
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. One word in the selection is approach. Say it

with me: approach. Approach means a way
of doing something. You can have more than
one approach when you ask someone to do
something. You can ask them nicely, or you can
demand it. Those are two different approaches.
2. En espaol, approach quiere decir manera
de hacer algo. Puede haber varias maneras
de pedir algo. Puedes pedir algo de manera
amable, o exigirlo. stas son dos maneras de
pedir algo.
word approach. (Point to different runners
in the photo.) All of these runners are trying
to win the race. They all have the same
approach. What are they doing that shows the
same approach? (Examples include: running
fast, using their arms.)
Key Vocabulary
4. Lets try to jump as high as we can. Lets take

turns showing the different approaches we
can use.
5. Lets pretend a baby is crying. Lets take turns
showing different approaches to get the baby
to stop crying.
6. Now lets say approach together three more
times: approach, approach, approach.
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
quarrel
PARTNER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is quarrel. Say it

with me: quarrel. To quarrel means to argue
or not agree about something. People who
do not agree about something often quarrel.
Remember when we learned the word argue?
Quarrel is another word for argue.
2. En espaol, to quarrel quiere decir discutir
o estar en desacuerdo. Las personas que no
estn de acuerdo a veces discuten. Recuerdan
cuando aprendimos la palabra argue
(discutir)? Quarrel y argue son dos palabras
que quieren decir discutir.
quarrel. (Point to the hockey players in the
photo.) Look at the faces on these players. Look
?
226
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages. (b) Comstock Images/PunchStock.
at how they are standing. You can see they do

not agree about something. They are having a
quarrel about what happened in the game.
4. Tell your partner about a time you had a
quarrel. What was the quarrel about?
5. Suppose two children are having a quarrel
about who gets to ride a bike rst. Think of
how you might help them. Share ideas with
your partner.
6. Now lets say quarrel together three more
times: quarrel, quarrel, quarrel.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
view
Word 6
assist
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
view
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is view. Say it with

me: view. View means the way you feel
about a person, thing, or event, your opinion
or attitude. You can have a view or attitude
about how you approach things. You can view
things in a happy way or an unhappy way.
2. En espaol, view quiere decir opinin, la actitud
que alguien tiene hacia una persona, cosa o
situacin. Puedes tener una opinin o actitud
sobre cmo hacer las cosas. Puedes ver las cosas
de manera positiva o de manera negativa.
word view. (Point to the mother and child in
the photo.) See how the mother and daughter
look. They have a happy view about the work
they just did.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner what your view is about
homework. Do you like it? Do you think
it is important? Start your sentence with
these words: In my view homework is
.
5. Tell your partner your view about how to
approach something new to do. For example,
what is your view about how to make new
friends?
6. Now lets say view together three more times:
view, view, view.
Key Vocabulary
Word 6
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is assist. Say

it with me: assist. To assist means to help.
When you help someone carry something
heavy, you assist him or her. Sometimes we
need people to assist us.
2. En espaol, to assist quiere decir asistir o
ayudar. Cuando ayudas a alguien a cargar
algo pesado, ests asistiendo a esa persona.
A veces necesitamos que alguien nos asista.
word assist. (Point to the person in the
wheelchair in the photo.) This man needs a
wheelchair to assist him to get from place to
place. The dog also assists or helps the man.
assist
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend your friend cannot nd something
that he or she has lost. Show how you would
assist your friend.
5. Pretend your partner is carrying a big pile of
books. Show how to assist your partner. Then
switch roles and repeat.
6. Now lets say assist together three more times:
assist, assist, assist.
228
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Blend Images/Jose Luis Pelaez Inc/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/ Don Farrall/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
determined
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
determined
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is determined. Say

it with me: determined. Determined means
to really want to do something. Most team
players are determined to win the game. If
you really want to learn how to ride a bike,
you are determined to learn.
2. En espaol, determined quiere decir decidido,
resuelto a lograr algo. Los jugadores de un
equipo casi siempre se proponen a ganar el
partido. Si tienes muchas ganas de aprender a
montar en bicicleta, ests resuelto a aprender.
word determined. (Point to the girl in the
photo.) Look at this girls face. It shows she
is determined. What is she determined to do?
(win the arm wrestling contest)
230
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/David De Lossy/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about something you were
determined to do. Did you do it?
5. Talk to your partner about what you would do
if you were determined to learn how to speak
another language.
6. Now lets say determined together three more
times: determined, determined, determined.
Word 1
give up
Word 2
give out
give up
Word 1
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use give up when we stop

doing something. Give up means to stop
trying. Say it with me: give up. When you
play a game, you should do your best and
keep playing. Do not give up.
2. En espaol, to give up quiere decir darse por
vencido. Cuando juegas un juego, pon lo
mejor de tu parte. No te des por vencido.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase give
up. It shows two children trying to complete
a puzzle. Its hard, but they will not give up.
Theyll keep working on the puzzle until it is
nished.
4. Ill describe some situations. After I describe

the situation, say,Dont give up. You can do
it!
Our baseball team is losing. But there are still
10 minutes left in the game.
I cant gure out this math problem. It is very
hard for me.
I dont know if I can run the last part of the
race. Im so tired!
5. I will say some words. If they are close in
meaning to give up say, give up. If not,
say nothing.
quit
keep working
stop trying
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: give
up, give up, give up.
Word 2
give out
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use give out to tell about

handing things to people. Say it with me: give
out. Give out means to distribute or hand
out. The teacher will give out the books to
her students.
2. En espaol, to give out quiere decir entregar
algo a otros, distribuir. La maestra distribuir
los libros a sus estudiantes.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase give out.
It shows a woman giving out samples of food
to the people at the market. I love when they
give out samples because I can try new things.
4. Lets take turns as we each pretend to give

out notebooks to ve friends in the class.
5. Now lets pretend we have a big bag of
presents. Lets act out how to give out the
presents to everyone in a group. Reach into
the bag, get a present, and give it out.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: give
out, give out, give out.
232
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./John Flournoy, photographer.
Word 3
pull up (to lift)
Word 4
pull up (to stop in front of)
Word 3
pull up (to lift)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can use pull up to talk about

pulling or lifting something to remove it. Say
it with me: pull up. Pull up means to heave,
lift, or remove something. The gardener will
pull up a bunch of weeds from the garden.
2. En espaol, to pull up quiere decir halar
o alzar algo para removerlo, arrancar. El
jardinero arrancar la maleza del jardn
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase pull up.
It shows how the shermen pull up the nets
from the water. When they pull up their nets,
they pull up their catch.
4. I will describe some actions. Say, pull up

if the actions describe someone pulling
something up. Say nothing if they do not.
The farmer yanked a bunch of carrots out of
the ground.
The lifeguard lifted the child from the pool.
The librarian put the book on the table.
The sherman raised his pole and brought in
the sh.
5. Ill say some words. If they are close in
meaning to pull up, raise your hand and say
pull up. If not, say and do nothing.
yank up higher
put down
bring to a higher place
lift from
raise from
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: pull
up, pull up, pull up.
Word 4
pull up (to stop in front of)
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we can also use pull up to talk

about when a car or other vehicle stops. Say
it with me: pull up. Pull up means to stop in
front of some place. The school bus will pull
up in front of the school at eight oclock.
2. En espaol, to pull up tambin quiere decir
detenerse enfrente de un lugar. Se usa para
describir cuando un vehculo para. El autobs
escolar se detiene enfrente de la escuela a las
ocho en punto.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase pull up.
This car pulled up in front of this house. Then
the driver got out and left it there.
4. Tell your partner about some places you

have seen a bus pull up in front of. Use the
sentence starter: I saw a bus pull up in front
of
. (Examples include: my
school, my house, a store, the bus stop)
5. Look at the picture again. Describe to your
partner what happens as a car pulls up to a
house. (Example: First we are riding along,
then the car pulls up to the house, and then
it stops.)
up, pull up, pull up.
234
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Sandra Ivany/Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Gary He/McGraw-Hill Companies.
kite, sail, hair,

ag, grass, water
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 4
Frog and Toad: The Kite
kite
sail
hair
ag
grass
water
ROUTINE
235
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Daniel Dempster Photography/Alamy Images. (tc) PhotoLink/Getty Images. (tr) Dave & Les Jacobs/Blend Images/Alamy Images.
(bl) Comstock Images/Corbis. (bm) eye35.com/Alamy Images. (br) Eyecon Images/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
danger
Unit 4 Week 5 Animal Teams
Word 2
beautiful
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
danger
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is danger. Say it

with me: danger. Danger means something
that can hurt or cause harm. Fire ghters
are in danger when they ght res. There is
danger if you play with matches.
2. En espaol, danger quiere decir peligro,
algo que puede causar dao. Los bomberos
se exponen al peligro cuando combaten los
incendios. Hay peligro si juegas con cerillos.
word danger. (Point to the word danger
in the photo.) See this sign. You can see the
word Danger. If you ever see a sign that
says Danger in the real world, stay away.
This danger sign is in front of poles that have
electrical wires that could cause harm.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is beautiful. Say

it with me: beautiful. Beautiful means very
pretty, pleasing to look at. A very pretty
painting is a beautiful painting. A very pretty
woman is a beautiful woman.
2. En espaol, beautiful quiere decir muy
bonito, hermoso, bello. Un cuadro muy
bonito es un cuadro bello. Una mujer bella es
una mujer hermosa.
the word beautiful. (Point to the owers the
photo.) This bouquet of owers is beautiful.
It is very pretty. The owers are pleasing to
look at.
238
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Arthur S. Aubry/Getty Images. (b) Stockdisk/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk with your partner about what you
would do if you saw the danger sign in the
photo.
5. Take turns completing the following
sentence: You would be in danger if you
. (Examples include: play
with matches, walk alone at night, talk to
strangers.)
6. Now lets say danger together three more
times: danger, danger, danger.
Word 2
beautiful
PARTNER TALK
4. Think of a beautiful picture you have
seen. Tell your partner what it looked like.
Why was it beautiful?
5. Look at the photo of the owers. What
makes them look so beautiful? Talk with your
partner about the photo. Use the sentence
frame: These owers are beautiful because
. (Examples include: they are
pretty colors, they are fresh, they are nice to
look at)
6. Now lets say beautiful together three
more times: beautiful, beautiful, beautiful.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
behavior
Word 4
group
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
behavior
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is behavior. Say it

with me: behavior. Behavior means the way
animals or people act, their actions. A dogs
behavior is good if the dog does not bark a
lot or bite. It is bad behavior if the dog chews
things in the house.
2. En espaol, behavior quiere decir la manera
en que las personas o los animales se comportan,
comportamiento. Un perro tiene buen
comportamiento si no ladra mucho ni muerde.
Tiene mal comportamiento si es travieso y
destruye las cosas del hogar.
the word behavior. (Point to the leopards
in the photo.) See how these leopards are
kissing each other. Their behavior is friendly.
The other leopard is looking for danger. Its
behavior or action is helpful.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner what kind of behavior a
friendly dog would have. What would the dog
do?
5. Talk with your partner about the behavior
of birds. What have you seen birds do when
they are afraid? What about when they are
hungry?
6. Now lets say behavior together three
more times: behavior, behavior, behavior.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is group Say it

with me: group. Group means a set of things,
more than one of things that are alike. One
child is a single child. Three or more children is
a group of children. Many animals together is
a group of animals.
2. En espaol, group quiere decir grupo,
un conjunto de cosas similares. Un nio es
un individuo. Cuando se juntan ms de tres
nios, ya es un grupo. Muchos animales juntos
tambin son un grupo.
3. Group in English and grupo in Spanish are
group
MOVEMENT
the word group. (Point to the animals in the
photo.) See these animals. There are many of
them together in one place. They are all sable.
This picture shows a group of sable.
5. Ill call out some names to make a group.
If I call your name, come up to make a group
of children.
6. Lets act out making different kinds of
groups. Ill tell you what kind of group to
make. Lets make a group of boys. Lets make
a group of girls. Lets make a group of books.
7. Now lets say group together three more
times: group, group, group.
240
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Tom Brakefield/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc/Jeremy Woodhouse/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
plead
Word 6
soar
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
plead
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is plead. Say it with

me: plead. To plead means to beg. If you
really want something you might have to
plead for it. For example, if you want a new
computer you might beg or plead for it for
your birthday.
2. En espaol, to plead quiere decir pedir
algo a travs de splicas, rogar. Si tienes
muchas ganas de algo, a veces tendrs que
suplicar para conseguirlo. Por ejemplo, si
quieres una computadora nueva, quizs
tendrs que rogarles a tus paps que te
regalen uno en tu cumpleaos.
word plead. (Point to the dog in the photo.)
This dog really wants it food. See the dogs
face. This is how the dog pleads, or begs, for
the food.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is soar. Say it

with me: soar. To soar means to y or rise
up high in the air. When a birds ies from a
tree up into the air, it soars. When an airplane
takes off, it soars into the sky.
2. En espaol, to soar quiere decir remontar
el vuelo, volar hacia el cielo. Los pjaros
remontan el vuelo desde un rbol. Los aviones
vuelan alto.
word soar. (Point to the bird in the photo.)
This bird soars through the air. It ies up high
in the sky.
242
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) JUPITERIMAGES/ Comstock Images/Alamy Images. (b) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you want your partner to come to
your house to play. Plead with your partner
to come. Then switch roles and repeat.
5. Talk to your partner about a time you
pleaded for something or someone pleaded
to you to do something. Tell how you or the
other person pleaded for what he or
she wanted.
6. Now lets say plead together three more
times: plead, plead, plead
Word 6
soar
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner why the photo is a good
picture to show what the word soar means.
(Examples include: Soar means to y high
and the bird is ying high; The bird is ying
in the air.)
5. Talk with your partner to name some
things that can and cannot soar. Use the
sentences:
can soar and
cannot soar. (Examples
include: Can: planes, rocketships, birds, ies;
Cannot: ants, dogs, cats, elephants)
6. Now lets say soar together three more
times: soar, soar, soar.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
vivid
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
vivid
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is vivid. Say it with

me: vivid. Vivid means bright, or colorful, or
standing out. Some birds have very bright
and colorful feathers. The colors are vivid.
2. En espaol, vivid quiere decir vivo, de
color intenso, llamativo. Algunos pjaros
tienen plumas de colores distintos e intensos.
Los colores son vivos.
3. Vivid in English and vivo in Spanish are
4. Now, lets look at a picture that shows the
word vivid. (Point to the sh in the photo.) See
how the patterns on these sh stand out. The
sh have vivid colors. They are so bright and
vivid they look like they are glowing.
244
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. (Provide children with crayons and paper.)
Work together with your partner to draw a
bird with vivid colors.
6. Tell your partner an animal or a piece of
clothing such as a shirt or dress that you saw
that had vivid colors. Describe the animal or
clothing to your partner.
7. Now lets say vivid together three more
times: vivid, vivid, vivid.
Word 1
get out
Word 2
get away
Word 1
get out
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use get out to tell about leaving

a place. Say it with me: get out. Get out means
to leave a place. When the bell rings at the
end of the day, we are all ready to get out
of school!
2. En espaol, to get out quiere decir salir;
abandonar un lugar. Cuando suena la
campana, todos salimos de la escuela.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase get out.
Look at that cute little animal. That is a mole.
The mole lives in a tunnel underground. He
has dug up through the dirt to get out of his
tunnel.
4. I am going to describe some situations. If you

think the animal is trying to get out, say It is
trying to get out. If not, dont say anything.
The bird is trying to open the door to its cage.
The dog is trying to get the food from the
table.
The rabbit is climbing up to the top of the
rabbit hole.
5. Now I am going to describe some places. If
you think the person should get out, say Get
Out! If not, say nothing.
a person is in a cage with a tiger
a person is in a house that is on re
a kid is in a toy store
a kid is in a classroom
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: get
out, get out, get out
Word 2
get away
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, get away means to escape, usually

from danger or from something that is chasing
you. Say it with me: get away. The robber
tried to get away from the police, but they
caught him.
2. En espaol, to get away quiere decir escapar,
generalmente para huir del peligro o de
alguien que te persigue. El ladrn trat de
escapar de la polica, pero lo capturaron.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase get
away. (Point to the cheetah.) This animal is a
cheetah. (Point to the zebras.) These animals
are zebras. Cheetahs hunt and eat zebras. It
looks like this cheetah is chasing the zebras.
The zebras are running fast. They are trying to
get away. Do you think the cheetah will catch
the zebras? Or will the zebras get away?

each yes or no.
Does a mouse want to get away from a cat?
Does a child want to get away from a friend?
Does a sh want to get away from a bird?
Would you want to get away from a lion?
almost the same thing as say get away, say
get away. If not, say nothing.
escape
run from
avoid danger
stand still
away, get away, get away.
246
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) image100/PunchStock. (b) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
Word 3
break off
Word 4
break up
Word 3
break off
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use break off to describe a kind

of separation. Say it with me: break off. Break
off means to separate from or come off.
If you pull too hard on a door knob, it might
break off from the door.
2. En espaol, to break off quiere decir romper,
separar. Si halas con fuerza el tirador de la
puerta, se puede separar de la puerta.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase break
off. Look at all this ice. (Point to the large
body of ice.) I think this is an iceberg. (Point
to the smaller chunks of ice.) See the smaller
pieces in the water. They are there because
they break off from the iceberg and fall into
the water.
4. Im going to say some sentences. Repeat each

sentence. Replace the word separate with the
words break off.
She will separate the handle from the cup.
She will separate the leg from the chair.
She will separate the branch from the tree.
5. I am going to describe some situations. If I am
telling about something that is breaking off,
say break off. If not, say nothing.
The bumper falls off the car.
Mia puts together a puzzle.
The caboose separated from the rest of the
train.
Jack takes a piece of his pretzel and gives it to
his little sister.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: break
off, break off, break off.
Word 4
break up
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use break up to describe how to

make pieces of a whole. Say it with me: break
up. Break up means to divide into pieces or
parts. If you drop a plate it may break up
into little pieces.
2. En espaol, to break up quiere decir partirse
en muchos pedazos. Si dejas caer un plato, se
puede partir en muchos pedacitos.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase break
up. Look at all this ice. It was once one
solid sheet of ice. But you can see how the
big piece of ice can break up into lots of
little pieces.
4. (Distribute clay or other modeling material

to children.) Lets break up the piece of clay
I gave you. How many little pieces can you
make?
5. Lets act out how we hammer a big rock so
that it breaks up into little pieces.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: break
up, break up, break up.
248
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Plan/Corbis. (b) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 5
Animal Teams
ants, sh, geese,

penguins, pigeons, sea lions
ants
sh
geese
penguins
pigeons
sea lions
ROUTINE
249
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Westend61/Alamy Images. (tc) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (tr) Russell Illig/Getty Images.
(bl) Pixtal/age fotostock. (bm) Simon Belcher/Alamy Images. (br) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
lucky
Unit 5 Week 1 Kittens First Full Moon
Word 2
leaped
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
lucky
PARTNER TALK
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is lucky. Say it with

me: lucky. Lucky means having things go
well, having good things happen. You are
lucky if you win a prize at a school fair. If you
like pizza and we are having pizza for lunch,
you are lucky.
2. En espaol, lucky quiere decir afortunado,
tener buena suerte. Si ganas un premio en
la feria escolar, eres afortunado. Si te encanta
la pizza, y eso es lo que vamos a comer hoy,
eres afortunado.
word lucky. (Point to the blocks in the photo.)
Look at how tall these towers are that the
children built. The blocks could have fallen,
but they did not fall. The children are lucky.
4. I dropped a carton of eggs in my kitchen. But

I was lucky. None of the eggs broke. Now you
tell your partner about a time you were lucky
at home.
5. Once I forgot to bring a pen to school. But I
was lucky. I had another pen in my desk. Now
you tell your partner about a time you were
lucky in school.
6. Now lets say lucky together three more times:
lucky, lucky, lucky.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is leaped. Say it

with me: leaped. Leaped means jumped over
or jumped up. If you jumped up the stairs,
you leaped up the stairs. If you jumped over a
fence, you leaped over the fence.
2. En espaol, to leap quiere decir saltar o
brincar. Si subiste las gradas a saltos, quiere
decir que lo hiciste con pasos agigantados. Si te
saltaste una cerca, pasaste por encima de ella.
word leaped. (Point to the hurdle in the
photo.) Look at the girl. She leaped over this
hurdle. She is in a race. She has to run fast and
leap over these hurdles to win the race.
leaped
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend you and your partner are
walking along a path. Look outthere is a
rock in the path! One of you step over the
rock and the other leap over it. Who leaped?
5. Lets all pretend we are in a race like the girl
in the photo. Lets run, run, run, and leap!
(Repeat the pattern several times.)
6. Now lets say leap together three more times:
leap, leap, leap.
252
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ken Cavanagh, photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies. (b) Digital Vision/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
discover
Word 4
dusk
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
discover
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is discover. Say it

with me: discover. To discover means to nd
something new. When you open a gift box,
you discover what is inside. When you read a
new book, you discover what the story is about.
2. En espaol, to discover quiere decir descubrir;
encontrar algo nuevo. Al abrir una caja
descubrirs qu contiene. Al leer un libro
descubrirs de qu se trata.
3. To discover in English and descubrir in Spanish
discover. (Point to the boy and the paper tube
in the photo.) See the boy. He is using a paper
tube as a telescope to see what he can discover
in the sky. What do you think he will discover?
(Examples include stars and the moon.)
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is dusk. Say it

with me: dusk. Dusk means the evening, just
before the sun goes down. It starts to get
dark at dusk. Dusk is the time between the
day and the night.
2. En espaol, dusk quiere decir anochecer,
justo antes de que se ponga el sol. Empieza a
oscurecer cuando se hace noche. El anochecer
es el tiempo entre el da y la noche.
word dusk. (Point to the sky in the photo.)
Look at the sky. You cannot see the sun any
more and the moon is not out yet. It is dusk.
It is just getting dark. You can still see the
outline of the people and lighthouse.
254
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Blue jean images/PunchStock. (b) Michael T. Sedam/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner about the rst time you
visited a place such as a friends house or a
new town. Tell something you discovered
about the place.
6. Tell your partner about the rst time you
tried a new food to eat. Talk about what you
discovered.
7. Now lets say discover together three more
times: discover, discover, discover.
Word 4
dusk
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner where you think you will
be today at dusk. Use the sentence frame: At
dusk I will be
.
5. Talk with your partner about what happens at
dusk. (Examples include: it starts to get dark,
its time to go inside, the streetlights come on)
6. Now lets say dusk together three more times:
dusk, dusk, dusk.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
mysterious
Word 6
pale
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
mysterious
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is mysterious.

Say it with me: mysterious. Mysterious means
strange, something that cannot be explained.
If someone is doing something and wont tell
you what it is, they are acting in a mysterious
way. If you hear a sound and you do not know
what it is, it is a mysterious sound.
2. En espaol, mysterious quiere decir misterioso;
algo que no se puede explicar. Si alguien
est haciendo algo y no quiere decir qu es, su
comportamiento es misterioso. Si escuchas un
sonido desconocido, es un sonido misterioso.
3. Mysterious in English and misterioso in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is pale. Say it

with me: pale. Something that is pale is very
light in color. Snow is white. It has almost
no color. It is pale. Light colors like pink and
yellow are pale colors.
2. En espaol, pale quiere decir plido;
descolorido. La nieve es blanca. Casi no tiene
color. La nieve es descolorida. Los colores
pasteles son colores plidos.
3. Pale in English and plido in Spanish are
word pale. (Point to the rose in the photo.)
Some roses are red. Red is not a pale color.
This rose if very light yellow. Light yellow is
a pale color.
256
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Burke/Triolo Productions/Brand X Pictures.
PARTNER TALK
word mysterious. (Point to the fog in the
photo.) See how dark and mysterious this
picture is. You do not know what is behind
the fog. You do not know what will happen to
the man in the boat. It is very mysterious.
5. Tell your partner about a time you thought
someone acted in a mysterious way. Who
was it? What were they doing that looked
mysterious?
6. Look at the photo. Pretend you and your
partner are in the boat. What would you say
to each other? Use the word mysterious in
your conversation.
7. Now lets say mysterious together three more
times: mysterious, mysterious, mysterious.
Word 6
pale
PARTNER TALK
5. Look around the classroom with your partner.
Tell each other some objects that you see that
look pale.
6. Draw a ower garden that has some pale
owers. Then share your picture with your
partner. Talk about which owers are pale
and which owers are not pale.
7. Now lets say pale together three more times:
pale, pale, pale.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
scatter
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
scatter
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is scatter. Say it

with me: scatter. When you scatter things, you
throw them so they are spread out all over. If
you stack blocks on the oor they are one on
top of another, but if you scatter the blocks,
they are all over the oor.
2. En espaol, to scatter quiere decir esparcir,
arrojar en distintas direcciones. Si colocas
cubos de madera uno sobre el otro formando
una torre y la torre se derrumba, los cubos
quedarn esparcidos por todo el piso.
258
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Robert Llewellyn/Corbis.
MOVEMENT
word scatter. (Point to the sky in the photo.)
Look at the stars. They are all over the sky.
They cover the sky. They are not in just one
place. The stars are scattered all over the sky.
4. Sometimes, when we plant seeds we scatter
the seeds all over the soil. Lets pretend to
scatter seeds.
5. Lets all stand up in a line. Now everyone
scatter around the room.
6. Now lets say scatter together three more
times: scatter, scatter, scatter.
Word 1
take off (to lift up)
Word 2
take off (to remove)
Word 1
take off (to lift up)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can use take off to describe

how some objects lift up. Say it with me: take
off. Take off means to leave the ground and
start to y. We have to keep our seat belts
on when the airplane takes off.
2. En espaol, to take off quiere decir
emprender el vuelo; despegar. Tenemos que
abrocharnos el cinturn cuando el avin va a
despegar.
3. This picture shows the phrase take off. The
rocket ship is taking off for outer space. Look
at the smoke it leaves in its path!
4. I am going to describe some situations with

airplanes. If you think the airplane is taking
off, say Its taking off. If not, say, Its not
taking off.
The airplane is going down the runway and
starts to lift into the air.
The airplane is coming down from the air and
lands on the ground.
The airplanes wheels come up, and the
airplane is off the ground.
5. Now I am going to name some objects. Say,
It can take off, if it is able to take off. Say
nothing if it cannot.
a helicopter
an airplane
a rocket ship
a truck
Word 2
take off (to remove)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we also use take off to tell what

we do when we remove something. Say it with
me: take off. Take off means to remove or
detach. I had to take off the price tag from
my new sweatshirt before I could wear it.
2. En espaol, to take off tambin quiere decir
quitar o desprender. Antes de estrenar mi
sudadera, tuve que quitarle la etiqueta.
3. This picture shows the phrase take off. You
wash your hands with soap to take off dirt
from your hands. Look at the hands in the
picture. The child washes his or her hands to
take off the dirt.

each question by saying either yes or no.
Should you take off your shoes before you go
to bed?
Do you need to take off the top of a jar to
open the jar?
Do you need to take off your hat if it is cold
out?
the same as take off say take off. If the
words do not mean the same thing as take off,
then dont say anything.
remove
detach
take something away from
glue together
260
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Word 3
sweep up
Word 4
sweep away
Word 3
sweep up
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use sweep up to describe what

we do when we clean with a broom. Say it
with me: sweep up. Sweep up means to pick
up or remove dirt from the oor with a brush
or broom. Before you mop the oor, you
should sweep up the dirt.
2. En espaol, to sweep up quiere decir barrer
el piso con una escoba o cepillo. Antes de
trapear el piso, hay que barrerlo.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase sweep
up. It shows how to sweep up with a broom.
4. Im going to describe what some people are

doing. Say sweep up if they are sweeping
up. Say nothing if they are not.
Kendra uses a broom to clean up the dirt from
the laundry room.
Fran brushes the dust from the oor.
Erin brushes her hair.
5. After I tell about each person, repeat
and complete this sentence: He (or she) is
sweeping up the
.
Keisha is cleaning the dirt from the kitchen
oor.
Mike is using a broom to remove the sand
from the front steps.
Mr. Collins is brushing the crumbs off of the
cafeteria oor.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: sweep
up, sweep up, sweep up.
Word 4
sweep away
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use sweep away to describe

what a storm or hurricane can do. Say it with
me: sweep away. Sweep away means to
knock down or destroy. A tornado can sweep
away many houses at one time.
2. En espaol, to sweep away quiere decir
llevarse algo con violencia, destruir,
arrebatar. Un tornado puede arrebatar
muchas casas de un solo golpe.
3. This picture shows the phrase sweep away.
It shows that a storm was strong enough to
sweep away houses and cars.
4. Think about going on a picnic. Tell your

partner what you would do. Then repeat and
complete the sentence to tell what would
happen if a strong wind came along. A strong
wind could sweep away
.
(Examples include: all of our food, the paper
plates, our drinks, the tablecloth)
5. Look back at the picture. Tell your partner
some things a strong storm or tornado can
sweep away.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: sweep
away, sweep away, sweep away.
262
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) image100/Corbis. (b) Photodisc/D. Falconer/PhotoLink/Getty Images.
bowl, full moon, pie,

cent, disk, checkers
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 1
Kittens First Full Moon
bowl
full moon
pie
cent
disk
checkers
ROUTINE
263
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Masterfile. (tc) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (tr) Janis Christie/Getty Images.
(bl) The McGraw-Hill Companies Inc./Ken Cavanagh Photographer. (bm) Ingram Publishing/Alamy Images. (br) Siede Preis/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
curious
Unit 5 Week 2 Meet Ben Franklin
Word 2
idea
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
curious
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is curious. Say it with

me: curious. When you are curious, you want to
know or nd out more about something. If you
see your friends whispering, you will probably
be curious about what they are saying.
2. En espaol, curious quiere decir curioso; con
ganas de averiguar algo. Si ves a tus amigos
hablando en voz baja, estars curioso. Querrs
averiguar qu estn diciendo.
3. Curious in English and curioso in Spanish are
word curious. (Point to the girl with the
stethoscope in the photo.) The girl can hear
sounds. Look at her face. You can tell she is
curious. She is curious about what she hears.
She wants to know what is making the sounds.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is idea. Say it

with me: idea. (Point to your head.) Anything
you think of is an idea. When you have
an answer to a question, it is an idea. For
example, if someone asks, What should we
do today? you might say, I have an idea.
Lets go to the park!
2. En espaol, idea quiere decir idea; algo
que te viene a la mente. Si se te ocurre la
respuesta a una pregunta, te llega una idea.
Alguien te podra preguntar, Qu hacemos
hoy? a lo cual t podras responder, Tengo
una idea. Vamos al parque!
3. Idea in English and idea in Spanish are
266
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Blend Images/Jose Luis Pelaez, Inc/Getty Images. (b) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
curious about. Tell what you would like to
know about it. Use the sentence frames: I am
curious about
. I want to nd
out
.
6. Talk about animals you are both curious
about. Tell what you would like to know.
(Examples include: I am curious about what a
snake feels like, what a lion sounds like.)
7. Now lets say curious together three more
times: curious, curious, curious.
Word 2
idea
PARTNER TALK
word idea. Look at the girl. She is raising her
hand because she wants to tell the teacher
what she is thinking. She wants to share her
idea.
5. Think about what you could do to have
fun after school. Tell each other your ideas.
Start with the sentence starter: My idea is to
.
6. Tell each other the best idea you ever had.
7. Now lets say idea together three more times:
idea, idea, idea.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
career
Word 4
fascinating
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
career
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is career. Say it with

me: career. A career is what someone does for
work. Your career is the job you will do when
you are an adult. When you grow up, you
might have a career as a doctor, as a scientist,
or as a teacher.
2. En espaol, career quiere decir carrera; la
profesin que alguien ejerce. Cuando crezcas,
tendrs una carrera. A eso te vas a dedicar.
Podrs ser mdico, cientco o maestro.
3. Career in English and carrera in Spanish are
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is fascinating.

Say it with me: fascinating. Fascinating means
very, very interesting. Some people think
the stars in the sky are fascinating. They like
to look at them and learn about them. When
you are interested in something and like to
watch it and learn about it, you are fascinated
by it. It is fascinating.
2. En espaol, fascinating quiere decir
algo interesante, irresistible o atractivo,
fascinante. A algunas personas les fascinan
las estrellas. Cuando te interesa mucho algo
y te gusta mirarlo y aprender sobre ello, te
fascina. Te parece fascinante.
3. Fascinating in English and fascinate in Spanish
268
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image 100/PunchStock. (b) Bananastock/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
word career. Look at what these people are
wearing. They all have on white coats. Then
look at the equipment in the ofce. You can
see a computer and tubes and jars. These are
clues to the career these people have. They
are scientists.
5. Lets pretend we have a career as doctors.
Lets act out being a doctor.
6. Think about another career. Take turns with
your partner acting out a career and guessing
which career it is.
7. Now lets say career together three more
times: career, career, career.
Word 4
fascinating
PARTNER TALK
word fascinating. Look at the girl. She is
watching and looking and touching the glass.
What do you think is fascinating to her? (the
bug in the tank)
5. Tell your partner about someone you think is
fascinating. Why is he or she fascinating?
6. Talk with your partner about something
fascinating you learned or read about in
school. What was so interesting or fascinating
about it?
7. Now lets say fascinating together three more
times: fascinating, fascinating, fascinating.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
improve
Word 6
investigate
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
improve
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is improve. Say

it with me: improve. To improve means to
make better. When you comb your hair, you
improve the way you look. Whenever you
make something better, you improve it.
2. En espaol, to improve quiere decir mejorar,
perfeccionar. Cuando te peinas, tratas de
mejorar tu apariencia. Cuando vuelves a hacer
algo, tratas de que te quede mejor.
word improve. This man paints his house.
He improves his house. How does painting
improve a house? (Examples include: It makes
it look better; It makes the house cleaner and
nicer to look at.)
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is investigate.

Say it with me: investigate. To investigate
means to nd out about. If you hear a
noise, you might want to investigate to nd
out what it is. Some people like to investigate
how things work. For example, they might
investigate what makes a watch work.
2. En espaol, to investigate quiere decir
investigar, averiguar, estudiar. Si escuchas
un ruido, tratas de investigar qu es. Algunas
personas investigan cmo funcionan las cosas.
Por ejemplo, pueden investigar cmo funciona
un reloj.
3. To investigate in English and investigar in
languages.
270
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Tom Grill/Corbis. (b) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner some ways to improve your
grades in school. (Examples include: study
more, take you time doing work, get help with
homework)
5. Tell you partner about something you want to
improve. Tell how you will improve it.
6. Now lets say improve together three more
times: improve, improve, improve.
Word 6
investigate
MOVEMENT
word investigate. This boy wants to know
about the object on the ground. He is
investigating the object. He is looking at it
to see what he can nd out.
5. Lets investigate what is under the table. Lets
look to nd out what is under there.
6. Now lets pretend we found a treasure chest.
Lets investigate to nd out what is inside.
7. Now lets say investigate together three more
times: investigate, investigate, investigate.
Word 1
jump into
Word 2
jump over
Word 1
jump into
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use jump into to describe a

kind of movement. Say it with me: jump
into. To jump into means to leap inside of
something. We all jump into the pool to cool
off.
2. En espaol, to jump into quiere decir
tirarse. Todos nos tiramos a la piscina para
refrescarnos.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase jump
into. It shows a girl who likes to jump into a
puddle. Do you like to jump into puddles?
4. I am going to name some things. If you can

jump into it, then say, jump into. If you
cannot jump into it, then say nothing.
the ocean
a swimming pool
a big box
a ball
5. Now I am going to ask some questions.
Answer yes or no for each one.
Can you jump into the ocean to get wet?
Should you jump into a lions cage at the zoo?
Can you jump into a pool from a diving board?
Can you jump into your school desk?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: jump
into, jump into, jump into.
Word 2
jump over
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use jump over to describe how

we get over something. Say it with me: jump
over. To jump over means to leap above.
I did not want to step in the puddle, so I
jumped over it.
2. En espaol, to jump over quiere decir pasar
de un salto, saltar por encima de algo. Para
no pisar el charco, salt por encima de l.
over. It shows runners who can jump over
hurdles in a race. They do not hit the hurdles
when they jump. Their bodies go over the
hurdles.
4. I am going to describe some actions. If they

describe jumping over say, You jumped over
it. If they do not, then say, You did not
jump over it.
I jumped from one side of a puddle to the
other.
I jumped from the side of the pool into the
water.
I leaped over a kitten who was sleeping on the
oor.
5. I am going to read some sentences. Repeat
each sentence. Replace the words leaped
above with jumped over.
The runner leaped above the hurdles.
The robber leaped above the wall.
The rabbit leaped above the bushes.
over, jump over, jump over.
272
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/Andersen Ross/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/Ryan McVay/Getty Images.
Word 3
jump off
Word 4
jump at
Word 3
jump off
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use jump off to describe how

we leap from a place or object. Say it with me:
jump off. Jump off means to leap from. It is
dangerous to jump off a ladder.
2. En espaol, to jump off quiere decir saltar o
tirarse de un lugar alto. Es peligroso saltar de
una escalera.
off. It shows the skydivers as they jump off
the airplane.
4. Im going to describe some situations. If you

think it is safe to jump off, then say Jump
off. If it is not safe, then say, Dont jump
off.
A lifeguard is on a diving board and wants to
go into the pool.
Juan is at the top of the stairs.
Sara is on the bottom step.
5. Answer yes or no to each question.
Can a cat jump off a chair?
Can a skydiver jump off a plane?
Can a ladder jump off the steps?
Can a buttery jump off a ower?
off, jump off, jump off.
Word 4
jump at
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use jump at to describe toward

where we jump. Say it with me: jump at. To
jump at means to leap toward something.
The kitten jumped at the mouse as it ran by.
2. En espaol, to jump at quiere decir caerle
encima a algo, lanzarse. El gato se lanz
sobre el ratn cuando pas por su lado.
3. This picture demonstrates the words jump at.
It shows a basketball player who had to jump
at the ball to tap it away.
4. Lets pretend that there are balloons hanging

from our classroom ceiling. The balloons have
strings attached to them. Lets all jump at the
balloons to try to pull them down!
5. Look at the picture again. Lets pretend we
are playing a basketball game, too. Lets jump
at the ball to tap it away.
at, jump at, jump at.
274
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) Stockbyte/SuperStock.
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 2
Meet Ben Franklin
sound, fossils, rocks,

space, animals, plants
sound
fossils
rocks
space
animals
plants
ROUTINE
275
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Index Stock/Alamy Images. (tc) Jason Edwards/National Geographic/Getty Images. (tr) Ingram Publishing/age fotostock.
(bl) Stocktrek/age fotostock. (bm) Altrendo/altrendo images/Getty Images. (br) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
extreme
Unit 5 Week 3 Stormy Weather
Word 2
predict
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
extreme
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is extreme. Say it

with me: extreme. Extreme means much
more than what is usual. It is not unusual
to have a rainy day. If it rains every day for
a week, that is extreme.
2. En espaol, extreme quiere decir extremo,
mucho ms de lo que es normal. Es normal que
llueva por un da. Si llueve todos los das durante
una semana, eso es extremo.
3. Extreme in English and extremo in Spanish are
extreme. If it is cold near the water, some ice
may form. But this photo shows a great deal
of ice. This shows extreme cold. There is an
extreme amount of ice near the water.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is predict. Say

it with me: predict. To predict means to
guess what will happen. What you predict
something you use clues to help you. For
example, if you see children standing in line at
a bus stop, you can predict that a school bus
will soon come to pick them up.
2. En espaol, to predict quiere decir predecir;
adivinar lo que pasar ms adelante. Algunas
pistas te ayudan a hacer predicciones. Por ejemplo,
si ves unos nios en la parada del autobs,
puedes predecir que pronto llegar el autobs.
3. To predict in English and predecir in Spanish
word predict. Look at the dark thick clouds in
the sky. The clouds are clues to what kind of
weather will be coming. You can use the clues
to predict that a big storm is coming.
278
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Nature Picture Library/Alamy Images. (b) Ingram Publishing/age fotostock.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner what it is like when the
weather is extremely hot. What do you do in
extreme hot weather? (Examples include: wear
cool clothes, go swimming, stay indoors in air
conditioning)
6. Draw a picture of some kind of extreme
weather. Share your picture with your partner.
Talk to each other about your pictures.
7. Now lets say extreme together three more
times: extreme, extreme, extreme.
Word 2
predict
PARTNER TALK
PARTNER TALK
5. Pretend it is raining outside. When you look

up at the sky the clouds seem to be going
away. Tell your partner what you predict
about the weather. (Examples include: I
predict it will stop raining; I predict the sun
will come out.)
6. (Hold up two different books: one
textbook and one picture book.) Tell your
partner which book you predict will be easier
to read. Tell which clues helped you predict
that.
7. Now lets say predict together three more
times: predict, predict, predict.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
breeze
Word 4
commotion
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
breeze
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is breeze. Say it with

me: breeze. A breeze is a light wind, a wind
that is not very strong. In the fall, the breeze
blows the leaves on the ground. You can
watch the leaves y around in the breeze.
2. En espaol, breeze quiere decir brisa; viento
leve. En el otoo, la brisa alborota las hojas.
Puedes ver las hojas volar en el viento.
3. Breeze in English and brisa in Spanish are
word breeze. This ag is ying in the breeze.
What would it look like if there were no
breeze? (The ag would be hanging down on
the pole.)
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is commotion.

Say it with me: commotion. A commotion
is a time when there is a lot of noise and
confusion. Too many people talking loudly at
once in a small room can cause a commotion.
If we all get up at once and run to the door,
we can have a commotion.
2. En espaol, commotion quiere decir
conmocin; mucho ruido y alboroto.
Cuando hay gente amontonada en un
cuartito, y estn hablando todos a la vez,
esa gente crea conmocin. Si todos nos
levantamos al mismo tiempo y corremos hacia
la puerta, podemos crear una conmocin.
3. Commotion in English and conmocin in
languages.
280
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Masterfile. (b) Photodisc/Alan and Sandy Carey/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner about a time you felt a
breeze when you were inside. Where did the
breeze come from? (Examples include: I felt a
breeze in my room. The window was open.)
6. Pretend you are standing in a meadow. Now
pretend a breeze starts to blow. Talk with
your partner about what happens to you and
the meadow. (Examples include: The breeze
blows my hair in my eyes; The breeze bends
the grass; The breeze makes me feel cold.)
7. Now lets say breeze together three more
times: breeze, breeze, breeze.
Word 4
commotion
PARTNER TALK
commotion. Look at all these birds. They are all
making noise and apping their wings at the
same time. They are causing a commotion.
5. Talk with your partner about what might
cause a commotion in a movie theater. Tell
what would happen. (Examples include: If
everyone tried to get out at the same time
it could cause a commotion. People might
get hurt.)
6. Tell your partner if you think it would be good
or bad to have a commotion in our classroom.
Tell why.
7. Now lets say commotion together three more
times: commotion, commotion, commotion.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
conditions
Word 6
forecast
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
conditions
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is conditions. Say

it with me: conditions. Conditions are what
it is like around you. The conditions in our
classroom are warm and dry. You can decide
what you will wear outdoors by checking
the weather conditions. For example, if the
conditions are rainy and cold you would wear
a coat and use an umbrella.
2. En espaol, conditions quiere decir condiciones;
modo de estar. Nuestro saln est en cmodas
condiciones. Puedes decidir cmo vas a vestir
segn las condiciones climatolgicas. Por
ejemplo, en un da lluvioso y fro, hay que llevar
un impermeable y un paraguas.
3. Conditions in English and condiciones in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is forecast. Say

it with me: forecast. A forecast is a prediction.
A forecast is usually about the weather.
People look at the weather forecast to help
them decide what to wear for the day.
2. En espaol, forecast quiere decir pronstico,
prediccin. El pronstico del tiempo nos
ayuda a decidir qu ropa vamos a usar ese da.
word forecast. This man is giving a weather
forecast. He is predicting what the weather
will be in the next ve days. Where can you
see someone forecast the weather? (on TV)
282
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Warren Faidley/Corbis. (b) Digital Vision/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
word conditions. (Point to the different parts
of the photo as you discuss each.) Look at the
weather conditions in this picture. The trees
are bent over, which shows it is windy. It is
wet, and the streets are ooded. These are
poor weather conditions.
5. Tell your partner what weather conditions
you like best.
6. Talk to your partner about todays weather
conditions. Are they good or bad conditions
for playing outside? Why?
7. Now lets say conditions together three more
times: conditions, conditions, conditions.
Word 6
forecast
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner what your weather forecast
is for tomorrow. Do you both have the same
forecast?
5. Talk about how the weather forecast can help
you each day. (Examples include: The forecast
can help me decide what to wear. It can help
me decide if I can go out to play.)
6. Now lets say forecast together three more
times: forecast, forecast, forecast.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
tranquil
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
tranquil
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is tranquil. Say it

with me: tranquil. Tranquil means peaceful
and quiet. If you want to go to sleep, you
want to be in a tranquil place. If you are in a
quiet room, you are in a tranquil place.
2. En espaol, tranquil quiere decir tranquilo,
pacco, quieto. Para dormir bien, hay que
buscar un lugar tranquilo. Si ests en un
cuarto sin ruido, ests en un lugar tranquilo.
3. Tranquil in English and tranquilo in Spanish
284
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock Images/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
word tranquil. Look at the beach. It is empty.
The sky is blue. The water is calm. It is quiet.
This is a tranquil place.
5. Draw a picture of an imaginary tranquil place.
Tell your partner about the place in your
picture.
6. Tell your partner about a real tranquil place
you have been to. Describe why you like it.
7. Now lets say tranquil together three more
times: tranquil, tranquil, tranquil.
Word 1
on its way
Word 2
get out of their way
Word 1
on its way
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use on its way to tell about

when something is coming. Say it with me: on
its way. On its way means in the process of
getting to a place. Our class is on its way to
the computer room.
2. En espaol, on its way quiere decir en
camino. Nuestro saln est en el camino al
saln de las computadoras.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase on its
way. It shows a school bus driving down a
road. It is probably on its way to school.
4. I am going to describe some situations. If you

think the situation tells about something that
is on its way, say on its way. If not, then say
nothing.
The pizza delivery truck is bringing pizza to
our class party.
The airplane is about to land in Denver,
Colorado.
The truck broke down on the highway.
The ambulance is coming to get the injured
man.
5. Now I am going to describe some things that
are on their way. Listen, then complete the
sentence: The
is on its way.
The taxi is going to pick up a passenger.
The school bus is almost at my house.
The ship will be back at the dock in an hour.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: on its
way, on its way, on its way.
Word 2
get out of their way
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use the phrase get out of

their way to tell what to do when you want
someone or something to move. Say it with
me: get out of their way. Get out of their way
means to move from the place where other
people, animals, or things are going to.
When a group of people runs in a race, the
police make sure that the cars get out of
their way.
2. En espaol, get out of their way quiere decir
quitarse del camino. Cuando un grupo de
corredores participa en una carrera, la polica
se asegura de que los vehculos se quiten del
camino.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase get out
of their way. It shows an ambulance racing
through the streets. When ambulances or re
trucks rush down the street, the other cars
need to get out of their way.
4. When re trucks rush down the street, the

other cars get out of their way. Talk to your
partner about why. Tell why it is important for
the cars to get out of their way.
5. Suppose some children are sitting in a movie
theater, and some adults sit in front of them.
Now the children cannot see the movie screen.
Tell your partner how the children can politely
ask the adults to get out of their way.
out of their way, get out of their way, get out
of their way.
286
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) StockTrek/Getty Images. (b) Jeremy Hoare/Life File/Getty Images.
Word 3
pick up a truck
Word 4
pickup truck
Word 3
pick up a truck
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use pick up a truck to describe

lifting. Say it with me: pick up a truck. Pick up
a truck means to lift a truck. A strong wind
can pick up a truck.
2. En espaol, pick up a truck quiere decir
levantar una camioneta. Un fuerte viento
puede levantar una camioneta del suelo.
3. This picture demonstrates the words pick up
a truck. It shows that the storm was strong
enough to pick up a truck.

Can a tornado pick up a truck?
Can a crane pick up a truck?
Can a kitten pick up a truck?
Can a tow truck pick up a truck?
5. Repeat and complete each sentence with the
phrase pick up a truck.
The wind was strong enough to
.
I need a tow truck to
.
I am not strong enough to
.
up a truck, pick up a truck, pick up a truck.
Word 4
pickup truck
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use pickup truck to describe a

kind of vehicle. Say it with me: pickup truck.
Pickup truck means a kind of vehicle used to
carry things. It usually has an open back to
make it easy to put things in and carry them.
We used a pickup truck to move furniture.
2. En espaol, pickup truck quiere decir un
vehculo que se usa para cargar cosas, una
camioneta. Una camioneta est abierta en
la parte de atrs para poder cargar cosas.
Usamos una camioneta para transportar
muebles.
3. This picture demonstrates the words pickup
truck. It shows two men standing by a pickup
truck. They are wearing helmets and looking
at some plans while they work. They use their
pickup truck in their construction job. What
do you think they carry in their truck?
4. Pretend you own a pickup truck. Tell your

partner what you would use it to carry. Where
would you carry the things in the truck?
5. Look at the picture again. Describe one of the
pickup trucks in the picture to your partner.
6. Repeat the words three times with me:
pickup truck, pickup truck, pickup truck.
288
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Warren Faidley/Corbis. (b) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Getty Images.
wind, rain, snow,

clouds, sun, ice
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 3
Stormy Weather
wind
rain
snow
clouds
sun
ice
ROUTINE
289
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) DAJ/Getty Images. (tc) Jupiterimages/Comstock Premium/Alamy Images. (tr) Image Source/PunchStock.
(bl) Andrew Paterson/Alamy Images. (bm) I. Glory/Alamy Images. (br) Jeremy Hoare/Life File/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
wondered
Unit 5 Week 4 Happy Fall!
Word 2
season
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
wondered
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is wondered. Say

it with me: wondered. Wondered means
wanted to know about something. Have
you ever thought about why the sky is blue?
Then you wondered about it.
2. En espaol, to wonder quiere decir tener
curiosidad; tener deseos de saber; preguntarse.
Alguna vez te has preguntado por qu el cielo
es azul? Eso es tener curiosidad o preguntarse.
word wondered. These people want to know
about this skeleton. One thing they wonder
about is how old it is. What else might they
wonder about? (Examples include: what it
looked like when it was alive, who found it, if
it was dangerous)
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is season. Say it

with me: season. A season is a time of the year.
There are four seasons: winter, summer, spring,
and autumn, or fall. What season is it now?
2. En espaol, season quiere decir estacin del
ao. Hay cuatro estaciones: invierno, verano,
primavera y otoo. Qu estacin estamos
viviendo ahora?
word season. Look at the color of the leaves.
They are turning red and orange. In what
season do the leaves turn from green to red
and orange in some places? (autumn or fall)
292
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner something about a famous
person that you wonder about. Talk about
how you could nd out about what you
wonder.
5. Pretend you are a new student in this school.
Tell each other what you might wonder about
before you come to school.
6. Now lets say wondered together three more
times: wondered, wondered, wondered.
Word 2
season
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk about the fall season with your partner.
Tell what the trees look like where we live.
Tell how the weather feels. Tell what kind of
clothes you wear in the fall season.
5. Tell your partner which season is your favorite
and why.
6. Now lets say season together three more
times: season, season, season.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
blaze
Word 4
increase
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
blaze
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is blaze. Say it with

me: blaze. Blaze means a bright show of
color. A blaze of color usually means that
something has the colors of a re. A blaze of
color is bright red, yellow, and orange.
2. En espaol, blaze quiere decir un resplandor
de colores deslumbrantes. Un resplandor
normalmente tiene los colores del fuego: rojo,
amarillo y anaranjado.
word blaze. Look at the blaze of color in these
trees. The colors are so bright they almost
look like re. The leaves are red and orange.
They are a blaze of color.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is increase. Say

it with me: increase. To increase means to
get bigger or to get higher. As you get older,
your age increases. As you get taller, your
height increases, too.
2. En espaol, to increase quiere decir incrementar;
crecer; aumentar de tamao o cantidad.
Entre ms creces, ms incrementa el nmero
de aos que tienes. Entre ms creces, ms
incrementa tu estatura.
3. To increase in English and incrementar in
languages.
294
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brownie Harris/Corbis. (b) Digital Vision/Siri Stafford/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Draw something that shows a blaze of color.
Tell your partner which crayons you used to
make your picture.
5. Show your partner the crayon you used that is
your favorite. Tell your partner why you like it.
6. Now lets say blaze together three more times:
blaze, blaze, blaze.
Word 4
increase
MOVEMENT
increase. (Point to the measuring spoons one at
a time from smallest to largest.) Look at these
spoons. This one is small. The size of each spoon
increases as they get bigger and bigger.
5. Lets pretend we are blowing up a balloon. Lets
put our hands around the balloon. Now it is
small. Lets blow up the balloon and watch how
it increases in size. Use your hands to show how
it increases in size.
6. Lets crouch down low so we are very short.
Then lets get up slowly to increase our size.
7. Now lets say increase together three more
times: increase, increase, increase.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
outline
Word 6
observe
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
outline
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is outline. Say it

with me: outline. An outline is a line you draw
around the outside shape of something. (Use
chalk to outline a book on the chalkboard.) To
make the outline of a book, I put the book on
the board and draw a line all around the sides
of the book. Lookthe outline shows the
shape of the book.
2. En espaol, outline quiere decir contorno;
una lnea que trazas alrededor de algo. (Use
tiza para trazar el borde de un libro en el
tablero.) Para hacer el contorno de este libro,
lo coloco sobre la pizarra y trazo su forma.
Miren: el contorno muestra la gura del libro.
word outline. (Run your nger around the
outline in the photo.) The red outline shows
the shape of the United States.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is observe. Say

it with me: observe. To observe means to
watch or to look at. When you look out
the window, you observe what is happening
outside. When you go to the zoo, you observe
the animals.
2. En espaol, to observe quiere decir observar;
mirar. Si miras por la ventana, observas lo que
est pasando afuera. Cuando vas al zoolgico,
observas los animales.
3. To observe in English and observar in Spanish
296
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock Images/PunchStock. (b) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
4. (Provide children with pencil or crayon and
paper.) Place the hand you do not write with
on the paper. Open up your ngers. Now
use your other hand to draw the outline of
your hand. (Have children share their hand
outlines.)
5. Lets work with your partner and take turns
drawing and guessing outlines of different
shapes in the air. Ill go rst. Guess what shape
I made an outline of. (Draw the outline of a
circle in the air.)
6. Now lets say outline together three more
times: outline, outline, outline.
Word 6
observe
PARTNER TALK
word observe. These people are observing
and taking notes about what they see. What
activity are they observing now? (They are
observing students going in to school.)
Tell each other what you observe.
6. Observe me as I work at the board. Tell your
partner what you each observe. (Draw a
simple picture such as a teddy bear or tree on
the board. Label the picture.)
7. Now lets say observe together three more
times: observe, observe, observe.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
scorch
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
scorch
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is scorch. Say it with

me: scorch. If there is too much heat and not
enough water, something can get scorched.
The hot sun can scorch the leaves of a plant. If
the leaves are scorched, they will turn brown.
2. En espaol, to scorch quiere decir
chamuscarse; tostarse; quemarse. Si hace
mucho sol y no hay suciente agua, algo se
puede quemar. El sol puede quemar las hojas
de una planta. Si las hojas se queman, se
ponen marrones.
word scorch. Look at the land. It is all cracked
and dry. It needs water. It is scorched. Maybe
is was scorched by re, or maybe it was
scorched by the hot sun.
298
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) PhotoAlto.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you have a garden. Tell your partner
what you do to keep your plants from getting
scorched.
5. Talk to your partner about what a garden
might look like if it were scorched.
6. Now lets say scorch together three more
times: scorch, scorch, scorch.
Word 1
pop out
Word 2
pop up
Word 1
pop out
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use pop out to describe how

something opens. Say it with me: pop out.
To pop out means to open suddenly from a
closed position or to bulge or stick out. In
the spring, owers pop out.
2. En espaol, to pop out quiere decir salir
inesperadamente de una posicin cerrada o
de un lugar; brotar. En la primavera, las ores
brotan de la tierra.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase pop out.
It shows that when it rains, umbrellas pop out.
They are opened from their closed positions
when their owners feel the raindrops on their
heads.
4. If you squeeze a box of juice too hard, the

juice will pop out. Tell your partner about
something else that will pop out if you
squeeze it too hard. (Examples include a paper
cup lled with water, an ice cream cone, a
container of milk, or a tube of toothpaste.)
5. Look at the picture again. Talk about how this
picture shows what the phrase pop out mean.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: pop
out, pop out, pop out.
Word 2
pop up
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use pop up to describe when

something comes out quickly. Say it with me:
pop up. To pop up means to come up quickly
from a downward position. When the toast is
done, it pops up from the toaster.
2. En espaol, to pop up quiere decir saltar de
repente. Cuando el pan est tostado, salta de
repente de la tostadora.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase pop up.
It shows a prairie dog. The prairie dog pops
up from the ground. One moment you see just
the ground and the hole, the next you see a
prairie dog!
4. Lets pretend we are toast in a toaster. Lets

squat down until we are done. When we are
done, I will say Pop up! and we will all pop
up. (Repeat several times with children.)
5. Now lets look at the picture again. Lets
pretend we are prairie dogs. We will pretend
that we are in the ground, and then we will
pop up and look around.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: pop
up, pop up, pop up.
300
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Gavin Hellier/Stone/Getty Images. (b) Design Pics/PunchStock.
Word 3
look out (be careful)
Word 4
lookout (place)
Word 3
look out (be careful)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use look out to warn of danger.

Say it with me: look out. To look out means
to be careful, watch carefully. If you walk
under icicles, you should look out for falling ice.
2. En espaol, to look out quiere decir tener
cuidado, estar pendiente de algo. Si caminas
por un lugar donde hay carmbanos, debes
estar pendiente de los pedazos de hielo que
caen.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase look out.
It shows that you should look out when you
cross the street. What should you look out
for? (Examples include: trafc, cars, buses)
4. Ill describe a situation. If you think I should

look out, say, Look out! If not, say nothing.
I am crossing the street, and a truck is coming
down the road.
I am eating dinner, and a friend is sitting with
me.
I am not watching where I am going, and
there is a closed door in front of me.
5. Repeat and complete each sentence with the
words look out.
When we cross the street, we
.
When we use a sewing machine, we
.
When we ride a bike, we
.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: look
out, look out, look out.
Word 4
lookout (place)
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use lookout to describe a place.

Say it with me: lookout. Lookout means a
place to look from. A lookout is usually up
high so that you can see things all around it.
Sailors can see for miles from the lookout at
the top of the ship.
2. En espaol, lookout quiere decir un lugar
ideal para vigilar. Los marineros pueden
vigilar desde lo alto del barco. Este es el lugar
ideal para vigilar.
3. This picture demonstrates the word lookout.
It shows a person at a lookout. From this
lookout, she can see very far away.
4. Pretend you are at the lookout with the

person in the picture. Tell your partner what
you can see. Start with the sentence starter:
From this lookout, I can see
.
5. Now pretend you are at a lookout on top of
a ship. Use the sentence starter: From the
lookout on the ship, I can see
to tell your partner what you see.
lookout, lookout, lookout.
302
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Spike Mafford/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc/Scott Thomas/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 4
Happy Fall!
tree, plate, mug,

window, bottle, bicycle
tree
plate
mug
window
bottle
bicycle
ROUTINE
303
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Creatas/PunchStock. (tc) Digital Vision/Alamy Images. (tr) Image Club Graphics
(bl) D. Hurst/Alamy Images. (bm) abstract stock/Alamy Images. (br) SW Productions/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
cub
Unit 5 Week 5 A Tiger Cub Grows Up
Word 2
wild
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
cub
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is cub. Say it with

me: cub. A cub is a name for some kinds of
baby animals. Baby animals have special
names. A baby dog is a puppy. A baby cat is
a kitten. A baby tiger is a cub. Baby lions and
baby bears are called cubs, too.
2. En espaol, cub quiere decir cachorro.
Los bebs de algunos animales se llaman
cachorros. Los bebs de los perros, tigres,
leones y osos son cachos.
word cub. See how small this little lion is.
It is a cub. It is a baby lion.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is wild. Say it with

me: wild. Wild means living free in nature,
not at home, not a pet. Wild animals live in
the forests and jungles. They not taken care
of by people. Pets are not wild. They live with
people and are taken care of by us.
2. En espaol, wild quiere decir salvaje; no
domesticado. Un animal salvaje no puede
ser una mascota. Un animal salvaje vive en un
bosque o en una selva. No puede vivir en una
casa con una familia. En cambio, las mascotas
s viven con nosotros. Nosotros las cuidamos.
306
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Peter Johnson/Royalty-Free/Corbis. (b) Creatas/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Draw a picture that shows a mother animal
with her cub. Tell your partner what kind of
cub your picture shows.
5. Tell each other as many words as you can that
describe the cub in your partners picture.
(Examples include: cute, little, young, small,
weak, tiny)
6. Now lets say cub together three more times:
cub, cub, cub.
Word 2
wild
PARTNER TALK
word wild. This giraffe is wild. It lives on its
own. It takes care of itself. It does not live
with people.
4. Tell your partner the names of as many wild
animals as you can think of. (Examples include
lions, tigers, elephants, and leopards.)
5. Talk with your partner about how the life of a
wild animal is different than the life of a pet.
6. Now lets say wild together three more times:
wild, wild, wild
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
mature
Word 4
newborn
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
mature
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is mature. Say it

with me: mature. Someone who is mature is
grown-up or an adult. When you grow up you
will be mature. A baby is not mature. An adult
is mature.
2. En espaol, mature quiere decir maduro; adulto.
Cuando crezcas, sers maduro. Un beb no es
maduro. Un adulto es una persona madura.
3. Mature in English and maduro in Spanish are
word mature. This is a buttery. A mature
caterpillar is a buttery. It is an adult. It is
fully grown with wings and all of its colors.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner some people you know who
are mature.
6. Talk about what you will be able to do when
you are mature, but you cannot do now.
(Examples include: drive a car, go to work,
get married)
7. Now lets say mature together three more
times: mature, mature, mature.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is newborn. Say

it with me: newborn. Newborn means just
born. A baby is a newborn. A newborn baby
needs lots of care. As the newborn grows, it
becomes bigger and stronger.
2. En espaol, newborn quiere decir recin
nacido. Un beb es un recin nacido. Un
recin nacido necesita muchos cuidados.
Ese beb ir creciendo grande y fuerte.
word newborn. (Point to the chick in the
photo). This chick just came out of its egg.
It is a newborn chick.
newborn
PARTNER TALK
4. We have learned the words cub, mature, and
newborn. Tell your partner the order of these
words that show the order of the life of a
tiger. (newborn, cub, mature)
5. Talk with your partner about words that
describe a newborn animal. (Examples include
tiny, weak, baby, and helpless.)
6. Now lets say newborn together three more
times: newborn, newborn, newborn.
308
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/PunchStock. (b) Discovery Channel Images/Jeff Foott/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
process
Word 6
remain
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
process
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is process. Say it

with me: process. Process means the steps
that are followed to do something. When
you learn to read, you follow a process. First
you learn letters, then you learn words, and
then you learn to put the words together to
read sentences.
2. En espaol, process quiere decir proceso; los
pasos que hay que tomar para hacer o lograr
algo. Para aprender a leer, hay que seguir
un proceso. Primero se aprenden las letras.
Despus se aprenden las palabras. Entonces se
juntan las palabras para formar oraciones.
3. Process in English and proceso in Spanish are
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is remain. Say

it with me: remain. To remain means to
stay. When it is raining outside, we like to
remain inside until the rain stops. In school,
you remain in your seats to do your work.
2. En espaol, to remain quiere decir
permanecer; quedarse. Si est lloviendo,
permaneceremos adentro hasta que deje de
llover. En el saln, permanecemos sentados
para aprender la leccin.
word remain. (Point to the cocoon in the
photo.) The buttery in this photo came out
of its cocoon. The cocoon remains behind on
the branch after the buttery comes out. The
buttery will y away. The cocoon will remain
on the branch.
310
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ralph A. Clevenger/Corbis. (b) Alan Weaving/Ardea.com.
MOVEMENT
word process. (Point to the different stages
in the lifecycle of the buttery shown in
the photo as you talk about each step.) This
picture shows the process a buttery goes
through to become a buttery. First it is
a caterpillar, then the caterpillar makes a
cocoon, and then it comes out of the cocoon
as a buttery.
5. Lets act out the process we would follow to
make a sandwich.
6. Now lets act out the process we would follow
to wrap a present.
7. Now lets say process together three more
times: process, process, process.
Word 6
remain
MOVEMENT
4. Lets all do some dance movements. When I
say remain there everyone stop and remain
in the position you are in. (Have children move
and say remain several different times.)
5. Lets play Simon Says. Listen closely for when
I say to remain. (Say things like: Simon says
stand up; Simon says remain standing.)
6. Now lets say remain together three more
times: remain, remain, remain.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
slender
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
slender
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is slender. Say it

with me: slender. Slender means long and
thin. A snake is slender, but an elephant
is not. Some people have long, thin ngers.
Their ngers are slender.
2. En espaol, slender quiere decir delgado y
largo, esbelto. Una serpiente es esbelta, pero
no un elefante. Algunas personas tienen los
dedos largos y delgados. Sus dedos son esbeltos.
word slender. Look at this caterpillar. It is
long and thin. This caterpillar is slender. See
the twig it is crawling on? Is the twig slender,
too? (yes)
312
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photos.com Select/Index Stock Imagery.
PARTNER TALK
4. Draw a picture of something that is slender.
Tell your partner what makes this thing
slender.
5. Look around the room and in your desk. Tell
your partner some slender things you see in
the room. (Examples include crayons, pencils,
pens, chalk, a pointer, and a ruler.)
6. Now lets say slender together three more
times: slender, slender slender.
Word 1
bite hard
Word 2
try hard
Word 1
bite hard
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the words bite hard to

describe how we eat something. Say it with
me: bite hard. To bite hard means to chomp
down with a lot of strength. Sometimes you
have to bite hard to get corn off of the cob.
2. En espaol, to bite hard quiere decir morder
con fuerza. A veces hay que morder con
fuerza para desprender los granos del maz.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase bite
hard. The boy has to bite hard to eat a raw
carrot because carrots that are not cooked are
not very soft.
4. Ill say the name of a food. If you have to bite

hard to eat it, then say, You have to bite
hard. If you do not have to bite hard to eat
it, then say, You do not have to bite hard.
corn on the cob
apple
watermelon
raw carrot
cooked carrot
5. Ill say some actions. If they describe biting
hard, then say, Bite hard. If not, then say
nothing.
using a lot of strength to bite
chomping down hard
hitting a rock with a hammer
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: bite
hard, bite hard, bite hard.
Word 2
try hard
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use try hard to describe how we

attempt to do something. Say it with me: try
hard. To try hard means to use a lot of effort,
to make a big attempt. You should always try
hard to do well in school.
2. En espaol, to try hard quiere decir usar
mucho esfuerzo para lograr algo o hacer un
gran intento, esforzarse. Hay que esforzarse
para triunfar en la escuela.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase try
hard. It shows children on a swim team. The
swimmers had to try hard to be on the team.
4. Tell your partner about a time when you had

to try hard in school. What did you try hard to
do?
5. Now tell your partner about a time when you
had to try hard to do something at home.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: try
hard, try hard, try hard.
314
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) The Image Bank/Superstudio/Getty Images. (b) Jupiterimages/BananaStock/Alamy Images.
Word 3
full
Word 4
empty
Word 3
full
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the word full to tell about

an amount. Say it with me: full. Full means
holding as much as possible, lled or
complete. If every seat is taken in a room,
the room is full.
2. En espaol, full quiere decir lleno; que
contiene la mxima cantidad posible. Si cada
asiento en el cuarto est ocupado, el cuarto
est lleno.
3. This picture demonstrates the word full. It
shows a full classroom. There is a student
sitting at every desk in the classroom.
4. Ill describe a place or object. If you think

the place or object is full, then say, The
is full. If it is not full, say,
The
is not full.
Every place on the shelf has a book.
The water is right up to the top of the glass.
Some of the seats in the classroom do not have
children sitting in them.
All of the spots in the parking lot have cars
in them.
5. Ill say some words. If the word means full, say
full. If not, say nothing.
complete
lled
packed
blank
6. Repeat the word three times with me: full,
full, full.
Word 4
empty
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the word empty to tell

when something has nothing in it. Say it with
me: empty. The word empty means with
nothing in it, not having anything. I drank
all of the juice in the glass, so now the glass is
empty.
2. En espaol, empty quiere decir vaco; que no
contiene nada. Me termin el jugo que haba
en el vaso. El vaso ahora est vaco.
3. This picture demonstrates the word empty.
It shows an empty classroom. There are no
students in the room at all. It is empty.
4. Ill describe a place or object. If you think

the place or object is empty say, The
is empty. If it is not empty,
say, The
is not empty.
There are no books on the shelf.
There is nothing in the dish.
Some of the seats in the classroom have
children sitting in them.
There are no cars in the parking lot.
5. Ill say some words. If the word means empty,
say empty. If the word does not mean
empty, say nothing.
having nothing
blank
packed
bare
6. Repeat the word three times with me: empty,
empty, empty.
316
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Doug Corrance/Taxi/Getty Images. (b) Ken Cavanagh/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 5
A Tiger Cub Grows Up
pounce, chew, bite,

climb, swallow, scamper
pounce
chew
bite
climb
swallow
scamper
ROUTINE
317
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Juniors Bildarchiv/Alamy Images. (tc) Design Pics Inc./Alamy Images. (tr) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock
(bl) Creatas Images/PunchStock. (bm) Radius Images/Alamy Images. (br) Big Cheese Photo LLC/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
supposed
Unit 6 Week 1 Olivia
Word 2
firm
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
supposed
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is supposed. Say it

with me: supposed. Supposed means expected
or required. We are supposed to listen when
someone else is talking. What are we supposed
to do when we hear the re drill bell ring? (We
are supposed to quietly get in line.)
2. En espaol, to suppose quiere decir deber,
suponer. Se supone que debemos escuchar
cuando alguien est hablando, pero no
siempre lo hacemos. Qu debemos hacer
cuando suena la campana del simulacro de
incendio? (Debemos salir ordenadamente.)
3. To suppose in English and suponer in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is rm. Say it

with me: rm. Firm means hard. Fruit that
is ripe is rm. Do you like to eat a soft apple
or a rm apple? Why? (a rm apple, because
it would taste sweet; a soft apple might be
mushy and rotten)
2. En espaol, rm quiere decir rme, duro.
La fruta madura est rme. Preeres comer
una manzana rme o una manzana blanda?
Por qu? (una manzana rme sera ms
dulce; una manzana blanda puede estar
podrida)
3. Firm in English and rme Spanish are
320
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision Ltd./SuperStock. (b) David Buffington/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
supposed. (Point to each girl in the costume in
the photo.) This girl is supposed to be a fairy.
What is this girl supposed to be? How can
you tell? (She is supposed to be a queen or a
princess. She has a crown on her head.)
5. Tell your partner what you are supposed to do
when you spill a drink. Use the word supposed
in your answer.
6. Look again at the photo. Describe a costume
you wore, or one you would like to wear. Have
your partner guess what you are supposed to
be. Switch roles and repeat.
7. Now lets say supposed together three more
times: supposed, supposed, supposed.
Word 2
firm
PARNTER TALK
rm. Look at the fruit. The woman is looking
for fruit that is rm, or hard. Then she knows it
will be tasty. If it is rm it will not be bruised or
mushy. What kind of foods do you think should
feel rm to taste good? (Examples include:
apples, squash, melons, oranges)
5. Take turns telling each other as many words
as you can that mean rm. Then tell each
other words that mean the opposite of rm.
(Examples include: hard, stiff, solid; soft,
mushy, gentle)
6. Take turns naming things in the classroom that
feel rm. (Examples include: chairs, desk, tables)
7. Now lets say rm together three more times:
rm, rm, rm.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
adventurous
Word 4
anxious
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
adventurous
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is adventurous.

Say it with me: adventurous. If you are
adventurous, you are daring. You are willing
to take a chance or a risk. If you like trying
new things or going to places you have never
been, you are adventurous.
2. En espaol, adventurous quiere decir
aventurero, dispuesto a tomar un riesgo.
Si te gusta intentar cosas nuevas o visitar
lugares desconocidos, eres aventurero.
3. Adventurous in English and aventurero in
languages.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is anxious. Say

it with me: anxious. Anxious means worried,
scared, or nervous. If you hear a strange
noise and do not know what is making it, you
might be anxious about it.
2. En espaol, anxious quiere decir ansioso,
preocupado, temeroso, nervioso. Si escuchas
un ruido desconocido, puedes sentirte ansioso.
3. Anxious in English and ansioso in Spanish are
322
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Mario De Biasi/Corbis. (b) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
adventurous. Look at the hikers. They are
exploring someplace theyve never been before.
They are adventurous.
5. Tell your partner something you have done
that was adventurous. Did you try a new food?
Did you visit a new place?
6. Tell each other if you think you are an
adventurous person. Tell why or why not. Use
the sentence frame: I am (not) adventurous
because
.
7. Now lets say adventurous together three
more times: adventurous, adventurous,
adventurous.
Word 4
anxious
MOVEMENT
word anxious. Look at the girl. She is waiting
for something that is making her feel anxious.
How can you tell that she is anxious? (Examples
include: Her face looks worried, her hands are
clenched, and she is sitting in a stiff position.)
5. Lets pretend we waiting to perform on stage,
and we feel anxious. Lets use our faces to
show that we are anxious.
6. Now lets pretend we are still waiting and use
our hands and feet to show we are anxious.
7. Now lets say anxious together three more
times: anxious, anxious, anxious.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
inquisitive
Word 6
insignificant
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
inquisitive
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is inquisitive. Say it

with me: inquisitive. When you are inquisitive
you want to know about things. You ask a lot
of questions. Some people want to know how
a computer works. They are inquisitive. What
are you inquisitive about?
2. En espaol, inquisitive quiere decir inquisitivo,
curioso, con deseos de saber. Las personas
inquisitivas hacen muchas preguntas. Hay
personas que quieren saber cmo funciona
una computadora. Son personas inquisitivas.
Qu te causa ser inquisitivo?
3. Inquisitive in English and inquisitivo in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is insignicant

Say it with me: insignicant. Insignicant
means not important. If a big rock fell from
a window it could be very dangerous. But if
a small feather fell, it would be insignicant.
It would have no effect on anything.
2. En espaol, insignicant quiere decir
insignicante, sin importancia, sin sentido.
Que una roca caiga desde una ventana puede
ser peligroso. Pero que caiga una plumita de
pjaro sera insignicante. No causara ningn
dao. Nadie se dara cuenta siquiera.
3. Insignicant in English and insignicante
languages.
324
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Corbis. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
word inquisitive. See how this child uses a
magnifying glass to nd out about what the
man has in his hand. This child is inquisitive.
5. Lets pretend we have a mysterious box but
are not allowed to open it. What would we
do if we were inquisitive about this box? Lets
act it out.
6. Lets pretend we hear a strange noise in our
classroom. Lets act inquisitive about the
noise.
7. Now lets say inquisitive together three more
times: inquisitive, inquisitive, inquisitive.
Word 6
insignificant
PARTNER TALK
word insignicant. These are small rocks. They
do not affect us much. We may walk on them
without noticing them. Most of the time we
pay no attention to rocks on the ground. They
are insignicant.
Name some things that are insignicant.
(Examples include: small pieces of chalk, dust
on the oor, a paper clip)
6. Think about some things in your room or
your home. Tell your partner some that
are important to you and some that are
insignicant.
7. Now lets say insignicant together three more
times: insignicant, insignicant, insignicant.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
route
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
route
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is route. Say it with

me: route. A route is a path or the way to a
place. You follow a route when you go from
your home to school. You go in a certain way
to get you from one place to another. If you do
not follow the route, you will not get to school.
2. En espaol, route quiere decir el camino que se
toma para llegar a un lugar, la ruta. Sigues una
ruta para llegar a la escuela. Vas en una direccin
particular para llegar de un lado a otro. Si no
sigues esa ruta, no llegars a la escuela.
3. Route in English and ruta in Spanish are
326
MOVEMENT
word route. Look at the road. If you follow
the path you will get to a place at the end of
the route. If you go off the path you will be
in the woods next to it. You would not be on
the route.
5. Ill show you a route to follow from my desk
to the back of the room. Then you follow the
same route.
6. Now take turns with your partner taking and
following a different route from your desk to
the front of the room.
7. Now lets say route together three more times:
route, route, route.
Word 1
really
Word 2
not at all
Word 1
really
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can use really to put emphasis

on an action. Say it with me: really. Really
means truly or very much. This test is really
hard.
2. En espaol, really quiere decir
verdaderamente, realmente o muy. Este
examen es verdaderamente difcil.
3. This picture demonstrates the word really. It
shows a girl playing with a dog. The dog really
wears her out by playing so much.
4. Ill say some sentences. Repeat each sentence,

but add the word really where it belongs. Ill
do the rst one for you. Ill say, I am tired.
Then you say, I am really tired.
I am happy.
It is cold outside.
He can sing well.
Is a pillow really hard?
Does an eagle really soar high in the sky?
Should you really study before a test?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: really,
really, really.
Word 2
not at all
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we can use not at all to emphasize

not. Say it with me: not at all. Not at all means
absolutely not, not one little bit. I am not at
all happy with the rainy weather.
2. En espaol, not at all quiere decir nada, ni un
poquito. No estoy nada contenta con tanta
lluvia.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase not at
all. It shows that the two children having a
pillow ght are not at all tired.
4. Tell your partner about a time when you were

not at all surprised. Use the sentence starter:
I was not at all surprised when
.
(Examples include: it started to snow, I got an
A, we won the game)
5. Look back at the picture. Then talk about
some things you like to do when you are
not at all sleepy. Use the sentence: I like
to
when I am not at all sleepy.
(Examples include: have some hot milk, read a
book, watch TV)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: not at
all, not at all, not at all.
328
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Doug Menuez/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/Daniel Pangbourne/Getty Images.
Word 3
Thats it! (thats all no more)
Word 4
Thats it! (thats the one)
Word 3
Thats it! (thats all no more)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can use the phrase Thats it!

when something is nished. Say it with me:
Thats it! Thats it! means thats all, thats the
end, there is no more. Thats it! I am nished
putting away all of my toys.
2. En espaol, Thats it! quiere decir es todo,
se acab o no hay ms. Se dice Listo! o
Todo listo! Todo listo! Ya termin de
guardar mis juguetes.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase Thats
it!. It shows the nish line of a race. Thats it!
The race is over.
4. Im going to describe an event. It the event is

nished say, Thats it! If not, say nothing.
I am done with the test.
The ball game is over.
The play has come to an end.
The movie has just started.
5. Ill say some sentences or phrases. If they
mean almost the same thing as Thats it say,
Thats it! If not, say nothing.
Its over.
The end
Im nished.
Get ready.
Thats it! Thats it! Thats it!
Word 4
Thats it! (thats the one)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can use the phrase Thats it! to

identify something. Say it with me: Thats it!
Thats it! means thats the one, that is what I
want. Thats it! I want that red dress.
2. En espaol, thats it! tiene otro signicado.
Tambin quiere decir eso es; se es el que
quiero. se es! Quiero ese vestido rojo.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase Thats
it. It shows a girl holding up the piece of the
puzzle that she needs. Thats it! Thats the
piece that will solve the puzzle.
4. Ill say some sentences that describe an item.

You say, Thats it! and repeat the sentence.
Thats the hat that I want.
That is my car.
That is the book I was looking for.
5. Ill ask some questions about things in this
classroom. Point to the answers and say,
Thats it!
Which is the rst desk near the door?
What do we look at to tell what time it is?
What is the United States Flag?
Thats it! Thats it! Thats it!
330
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) image100/Corbis. (b) Iconica/Jose Luis Pelaez/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 1
Olivia
read, paint, show and tell,

swim, sing, sew
read
paint
show and tell
swim
sing
sew
ROUTINE
331
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) BananaStock/PunchStock. (tc) image100/PunchStock. (tr) SuperStock/Alamy Images.
(bl) Ryan McVay/PunchStock. (bm) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (br) Keith Thomas Productions/PictureQuest.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
errand
Unit 6 Week 2 Whistle for Willie
Word 2
suddenly
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
errand
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is errand. Say it with

me: errand. An errand is a short trip to do or
buy something. When you go to the store to
buy a box of juice, you go on an errand.
2. En espaol, errand quiere decir mandado,
una salida rpida para hacer o comprar algo.
Cuando sales al supermercado a comprar jugo,
haces un mandado.
word errand. This mom and her son and
daughter went on an errand together. They
went to the store to get some food.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is suddenly.

Say it with me: suddenly. Suddenly means
without warning, quickly, unexpected. If
it suddenly starts to rain, the rain falls quickly.
You did not expect it to rain, so you might
get very wet.
2. En espaol, suddenly quiere decir
repentinamente, inesperadamente. Si
empieza a llover repentinamente, llueve
de repente. Como no esperabas que lloviera,
te podras mojar.
334
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock/PunchStock. (b) Ingram Publishing/age fotostock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about an errand you went
on. Who did you go with? What did you get?
5. Look again at the photo. What do you think
the mom and girl will do now? Do you think
they will go on another errand? Talk with your
partner about it.
6. Now lets say errand together three more
times: errand, errand, errand.
Word 2
suddenly
MOVEMENT
word suddenly. Look at the lightning in the
sky. Lightning strikes suddenly. First it is not
there, then suddenly, with no warning
boomit strikes.
4. Lets take a walk around the room. Show what
we do if we stop suddenly.
5. Lets pretend we are reading a book, and then
suddenly start to laugh.
6. Now lets say suddenly together three more
times: suddenly, suddenly, suddenly.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
dare
Word 4
humble
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
dare
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is dare. Say it

with me: dare. To dare means to challenge
someone to do something. Dare can also
mean that you have the courage to do
something. I do not have the courage to sing
in front of people. I would not dare do it.
2. En espaol, to dare quiere decir desaar o retar
a alguien a hacer algo; atreverse a hacer algo.
No tengo la valenta para cantar en frente de
otras personas. No me atrevo a hacerlo.
word dare. These children are learning how to
defend themselves. They are in a position that
dares others to attack them.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a time you dared to do
something different. Use the sentence frame:
I dared to
.
5. Pretend you wanted your partner to eat a
strange new kind of food. Use the word dare
to challenge your partner to eat it.
6. Now lets say dare together three more times:
dare, dare, dare.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is humble. Say

it with me: humble. If you are humble, you
do not want attention. People who do nice
things for others are often humble. They do
not want a lot of attention from others. They
just want to help.
2. En espaol, humble quiere decir humilde,
sin llamar la atencin, sin orgullo. Las
personas que sirven a los dems por lo
general son personas humildes. No piden
atencin. Slo quieren ayudar.
3. Humble in English and humilde in Spanish are
humble
PARTNER TALK
word humble. This girl just danced on stage.
She is humble. She is hiding behind the curtain
because she does not want a lot of attention
from the audience.
5. Tell your partner how to be humble if you just
got the highest mark in the class on a test.
6. Who is the most humble person you know or
know about? Talk with your partner about
this person. What does he or she do that is
humble?
7. Now lets say humble together three more
times: humble, humble, humble.
336
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photographers Choice/John-Francis Bourke/Getty Images. (b) Purestock/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
permit
Word 6
predicament
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
permit
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is permit. Say it

with me: permit. To permit means to allow.
If your parents let you stay up late on the
weekend, they permit you to stay up.
2. En espaol, to permit quiere decir permitir,
dejar que algo sea posible. Si tus padres te
dejan acostarte tarde los nes de semana,
ellos permiten que lo hagas.
3. To permit in English and permitir in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is predicament.

Say it with me: predicament. A predicament is
a difcult situation or a situation where there
is a problem. If you lock yourself out of your
house, you are in a predicament. If you get
a at tire while riding your bike, you are in
a predicament.
2. En espaol, predicament quiere decir
situacin difcil donde existe un problema,
un aprieto. Si cierras tu casa con llave y no
tienes tus llaves, ests en un aprieto. Si se te
poncha la llanta mientras andas en bicicleta,
ests en un aprieto.
338
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Bananastock/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
word permit. The parents of these children
permit them to ride bikes, but only if they
wear their helmets. They do not permit them
to ride without helmets.
5. Ask your partner if the teacher permits him or
her to call out answers. Then after answering,
switch roles and repeat.
6. Tell your partner one thing you would permit
a dog to do, and one thing you would not
permit a dog to do.
7. Now lets say permit together three more
times: permit, permit, permit.
Word 6
predicament
PARTNER TALK
word predicament. The car broke down.
It does not work. This woman is in a
predicament. What does she do to help x
this predicament? (She is calling for help
on the phone.)
4. Tell your partner about a predicament you
had. What did you do about it?
5. Tell your partner about a predicament that
someone else had. What happened?
6. Now lets say predicament together three
more times: predicament, predicament,
predicament.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
solution
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
solution
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is solution. Say it with

me: solution. Solution means the answer to a
problem, or the way to x a problem. If you are
asked to nd one and one, the solution is two. One
solution for xing a at tire is to change the tire.
2. En espaol, solution quiere decir solucin,
manera de resolver un problema. Si se poncha
una llanta, hay una solucin: cambiar la llanta.
3. Solution in English and solucin in Spanish are
solution. (Point to the girl at the end of the
number mats in the photo.) Look at the numbers.
This girl must put the next number onto the mat.
What is the solution? How do you know? (Seven,
because when you count, seven comes after six.)
340
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Polka Dot Images/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
5. Ill put a problem on the board. Work with
your partner to nd the solution. Then, we
will share the solutions. (Write this problem
on the board: 2 + 5 - 6 = ?)
6. Tell your partner about a problem you had or
a predicament you were in. Then tell about
the solution you used to solve the problem.
Was it a good solution? Why or why not?
7. Now lets say solution together three more
times: solution, solution, solution.
Word 1
start home
Word 2
get home
Word 1
start home
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use start home to tell about the

beginning of the trip home. Say it with me:
start home. Start home means begin to go
back to where you live. After the game I will
start home.
2. En espaol, to start home quiere decir
regresar a casa. Despus del partido voy a
regresar a casa.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase start
home. It shows children getting on the school
bus after school. They are leaving school to
start home.
4. Tell your partner about a place you leave to

start home. Use this sentence: When I leave
I start home. (Examples include:
school, the mall, the store, the playground)
5. Tell your partner how you start home from
school. Use the sentence: When I start home
from school I
. (Examples include:
ride the bus, ride in my car, ride my bike, walk,
take a train)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: start
home, start home, start home.
Word 2
get home
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use get home to tell about

arriving at home. Say it with me: get home.
Get home means to arrive at where you live.
I get home from school at three oclock.
2. En espaol, to get home quiere decir llegar a
casa. Llegar a casa de la escuela a las fres en
punto.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase get
home. It shows a boy who runs to his mother
when he gets home.
4. Tell your partner some things you do when

you get home from school. Use the sentence:
When I get home from school I
.
5. Tell your partner about a time it took you a
long time to get home. Then tell about a time
it took a short time to get home. Talk about
how you got home both times.
home, get home, get home.
342
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock/PictureQuest/Jupiterimages. (b) Image Source Black/Alamy Images.

Word 4
look into
(look into a mirror)
Word 3
look into (to study something)
Word 3
look into (look into a mirror)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can use look into to tell about

taking a glance. Say it with me: look into.
Look into means to glance or turn your eyes
into or at something. Look into the box to
see what is inside.
2. En espaol, to look into quiere decir mirar
adentro de algo o hacia una cosa. Mira
dentro de la caja para ver qu contiene.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase look
into. It shows a girl who is playing dress up.
She looks into a mirror to see how she looks in
her costume.
4. Im going to name some objects. If you can

look into them say, You can look into it. If
not say, You cannot look into it.
a mirror
a house
an opened box
a locked safe
a wall
5. Im going to describe some actions. If I am
looking into something say, You are looking
into it. If not say, You are not looking into
it.
I see myself in the mirror.
I see what is inside the bag.
I close the door to the house.
I stare at the inside of my closet.
into, look into, look into.
Word 4
look into (to study something)
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we can use look into to tell about

nding out about something. Say it with
me: look into. Look into means to study
something or to nd out about something.
The police ofcer will look into the robbery.
2. En espaol, to look into tiene otro signicado.
Tambin quiere decir estudiar algo o
averiguar algo; investigar. El polica
investigar el robo.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase look
into. It shows a boy studying. He is looking
into a subject he must learn about for school.
4. Think about your favorite animal. What would

you like to look into about that animal?
Do you want to know why, where, or how
something happens with the animal? Tell
your partner using the sentence starter: I
would like to look into
. (Examples
include: why a dog sheds, where penguins
live, how lions eat)
5. Tell your partner about something you have
already looked into for school. What did you
learn after you looked into it?
into, look into, look into.
344
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ryan McVay/Getty Images. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 2
Whistle for Willie
whistle, skate, write,

draw, dance, pay attention
whistle
skate
write
draw
dance
pay attention
ROUTINE
345
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Zefa RF/Alamy Images. (tc) Lisette Le Bon/SuperStock. (tr) Laurence Mouton/PhotoAlto/PictureQuest.
(bl) Valueline/PunchStock. (bm) Inti St. Clair/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (br) image100/Corbis.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
interesting
Unit 6 Week 3 Cool Jobs
Word 2
ordinary
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
interesting
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is interesting. Say

it with me: interesting. When something is
interesting, you want to spend time doing it
or looking at it. It is interesting to learn new
things. Some people think it is interesting to
watch how animals act. An interesting book
is a book that someone enjoys reading and
wants to read more of.
2. En espaol, interesting quiere decir
interesante, algo que te llama la atencin.
A mucha gente le interesa aprender cosas
nuevas. Algunas personas piensan que es
interesante observar a los animales. Un libro
interesante es uno que nos gusta leer.
3. Interesting in English and interesante in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is ordinary.

Say it with me: ordinary. Something that is
ordinary isnt special. On an ordinary school
day, we have math and reading. We do not
have parties on ordinary days.
2. En espaol, ordinary quiere decir ordinario,
comn y corriente, nada especial. En un da de
clases ordinario vemos matemticas y lectura.
No tenemos estas en los das ordinarios.
3. Ordinary in English and ordinario in Spanish
348
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Charles Smith/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
word interesting. Look at how these children
are studying the pinecones. They nd these
pinecones interesting. They want to look at
them and learn about them.
5. Tell your partner about an interesting
story you read. Why did you think it was
interesting?
6. Talk to your partner about the most
interesting person you know or have seen
on television. What makes this person so
interesting?
7. Now lets say interesting together three more
times: interesting, interesting, interesting.
Word 2
ordinary
MOVEMENT
word ordinary. Look at the cars. There is
nothing very special about them. They are
ordinary cars.
5. Lets pretend we are reading a book the
ordinary way. Then lets show a special or
unusual way to read a book.
6. Lets walk in an ordinary way. Now lets walk
in a funny or silly way.
7. Now lets say ordinary together three
more times: ordinary, ordinary, ordinary.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
duty
Word 4
equipment
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
duty
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is duty. Say it

with me: duty. Duty means a chore or
responsibility. It is your duty to come to
school everyday.
2. En espaol, duty quiere decir responsabilidad,
obligacin, deber. Es tu deber venir a clases
todos los das.
word duty. This girl has a duty to help with the
laundry. What other duties might she have?
(Examples include: feed the dog, do the dishes)
PARTNER TALK
4. Draw a picture that shows a duty you have at
home. Tell your partner about your picture.
5. Tell your partner a duty you have in school.
Use the sentence frame: In school, it is my
duty to
.
6. Now lets say duty together three more times:
duty, duty, duty.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is equipment.

Say it with me: equipment. Equipment means
tools used to do a certain job. Football
players use equipment such as footballs,
helmets, and padding when they play. Fire
ghters use equipment such as a hose, helmet,
and ax when they ght res.
2. En espaol, equipment quiere decir equipo,
las herramientas necesarias para realizar
un trabajo. Los futbolistas usan pelotas de
ftbol, cascos y hombreras para jugar. Los
bomberos usan equipo como mangueras,
cascos y hachas para combatir incendios.
3. Equipment in English and equipo in Spanish
equipment
PARTNER TALK
word equipment. (Point to the girl in the
photo.) This girl is using safety equipment
while she is on her skateboard. See the helmet
and knee pads?
5. Tell your partner what kind of equipment
you need to go on a camping trip. (Examples
include: tent, sleeping bag, lamp)
6. Talk with your partner about a job that uses
special equipment, such as a doctor, police
ofcer, or builder. Then talk about the
equipment needed to do the job.
7. Now lets say equipment together three more
times: equipment, equipment, equipment.
350
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source Black/Getty Images. (b) JUPITERIMAGES/ Comstock Images/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
profession
Word 6
satisfaction
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
profession
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is profession. Say

it with me: profession. A profession is a job
that a person needs special training to do.
Doctors go to school for many years to learn
their profession.
2. En espaol, profession quiere decir profesin,
un ocio que requiere de una educacin o
entrenamiento para ejercer. Los doctores
tienen que ir a la universidad por muchos aos
para aprender su profesin.
3. Profession in English and profesin in Spanish
word profession. This man is an animal doctor.
He went to school for many years to learn this
profession.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is satisfaction.

Say it with me: satisfaction. Satisfaction means
contentment and happiness. We usually
feel satisfaction when we do a good job.
When we are happy with our friends, we feel
satisfaction, too.
2. En espaol, satisfaction quiere decir
satisfaccin, el estar complacido y contento.
Nos da satisfaccin realizar un buen trabajo.
Cuando estamos rodeados de amigos,
sentimos satisfaccin.
3. Satisfaction in English and satisfaccin in
languages.
352
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Corbis. (b) SW Productions/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Pretend that you want to be an animal doctor.
Talk to your partner about some things you
have to learn to be in that profession.
6. Tell your partner about someone you know
who works in a profession. What is the
profession? What does the person do in this
profession?
7. Now lets say profession together three more
times: profession, profession, profession.
Word 6
satisfaction
PARTNER TALK
word satisfaction. These children are enjoying
their dog. They are happy and feeling good.
They have satisfaction with their pet.
5. Tell your partner about something you did
that made you feel satisfaction after you
were done.
6. Take turns naming words that tell how you
feel when you feel satisfaction. (Examples
include: happy, content, relaxed, pleasure,
glad)
7. Now lets say satisfaction together three more
times: satisfaction, satisfaction, satisfaction.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
thorough
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
thorough
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is thorough. Say it

with me: thorough. Thorough means complete
and very careful. When you wash your hands,
do a thorough job to kill all of the germs.
2. En espaol, thorough quiere decir completo,
absoluto, con mucho cuidado. Hay que
lavarse las manos con mucho cuidado para
matar todos los grmenes.
the word thorough. This doctor is doing a
thorough examination on this patient. She
wants to check this patient carefully and
completely to be sure he is not sick.
354
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock Images/PictureQuest.
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend you lost an important paper in your
desk. Lets act out doing a thorough search for
the paper.
5. Lets act out how to do a thorough job of
washing our hands and then of brushing our
teeth.
6. Now lets say thorough together three more
times: thorough, thorough, thorough.
Word 1
pull out (yank out)
Word 2
pull out (leave)
Word 1
pull out (yank out)
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we can use pull out to describe

taking something out from its place. Say it
with me: pull out. Pull out means to yank
from or yank out. I will pull out my tooth
when it gets very loose.
2. En espaol, to pull out quiere decir arrancar
algo de su lugar; sacar de un tirn. Cuando
mi diente ya est muy ojo, me lo voy a sacar
de un tirn.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase pull out.
This child must pull out the carrot from the
ground to get the carrot. (Point to the carrot.)
Because it was growing in the ground, it will
take a lot of strength to pull it out.
4. I will describe some actions. Say, pull out

if the actions describe someone pulling out
something. Say nothing if they do not.
The gardener yanked a bunch of weeds out of
the ground.
Amber took her lunch out from her lunchbox.
I caught a sh and got it out of the water.
Mika pulled the door closed.
5. Ill say some words. If they are close in
meaning to pull out, raise your hand and say
pull out. If not, say and do nothing.
yank
take out
tug
raise from
push in
out, pull out, pull out.
Word 2
pull out (leave)
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we can use pull out to tell about

leaving. Say it with me: pull out. Pull out
means to leave something you were in or
somewhere you were at. The team pulled
out of the competition when the star player
was hurt.
2. En espaol, to pull out tambin quiere decir
retirarse; abandonar un lugar o un evento.
El equipo se retir de la competencia cuando
su jugador estrella se lastim.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase pull out.
It shows a driver in a car. The car pulls out of,
or leaves, the driveway.
4. Tell your partner about some places you have

seen a bus or car or train pull out of. Use the
sentence starter: I saw a [bus, car, train] pull
up out of
. (Examples include:
a garage, a train station, a bus station, a
driveway)
5. Look at the picture again. Describe to your
partner what happens as a car pulls out of a
driveway. (First the car is not moving, then the
driver starts the car, and then it moves away
from the house.)
out, pull out, pull out.
356
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photonica/Adie Bush/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/Noel Hendrickson/Getty Images..
Word 3
get to work (start work)
Word 4
get to work (travel to work)
Word 3
get to work (start work)
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we can use get to work to tell

about starting to work. Say it with me: get to
work. Get to work means begin doing your
job or what you must do. In school we get to
work as soon as we sit down in the morning.
2. En espaol, to get to work quiere decir
empezar a trabajar; poner manos a la obra.
En la escuela, empezamos a trabajar en
cuanto nos sentamos en la maana.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase get to
work. It shows children getting to work in
school. They are nding places on the globe.
4. Lets pretend we are carpenters building

something. We are all relaxing and eating
lunch. But when I say Lets get to work!
everyone pretend to start building . (Act out
eating lunch, then say Lets get to work.)
5. Lets do this same activity. This time we will
act out being students in school. You can talk
act out talking to each other, but when I say
Lets get to work! stop talking and start
acting out doing school work.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: get to
work, get to work, get to work
Word 4
get to work (travel to work)
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we can use get to work to tell

about going to work. Say it with me: get to
work. Get to work means to travel to your
job. Some people get to work by bus.
2. En espaol, to get to work tiene otro
signicado. Tambin quiere decir viajar a su
trabajo. Algunas personas viajan a su trabajo
por autobs.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase get to
work. It shows that some people get to work
by train.
4. Your work is your school. Take turns asking

and answering each other about how you
each get to work.
5. Now talk about what you both do rst when
you get to work (which is really school). Use
this sentence to begin: When I rst get to
work I
.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: get to
work, get to work, get to work.
358
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Pixland/PunchStock. (b) Photodisc/Kent Knudson/PhotoLink/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 3
Cool Jobs
zoo, airport, hotel,

ofce, circus, police station
zoo
airport
hotel
ofce
circus
police station
ROUTINE
359
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) M Stock/Alamy Images. (tc) Photowood Inc./Alamy Images. (tr) Michael Blann/Digital Vision/Alamy Images.
(bl) Creatas Images/PictureQuest. (bm) Larry Lilac/Alamy Images. (br) Darrin Klimek/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
invisible
Unit 6 Week 4 Dot and Jabber and the Big Bug Mystery
Word 2
clues
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
invisible
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is invisible. Say

it with me: invisible. When something is
invisible, you cannot see it. On a cloudy day,
you cannot see the sun. It is still in the sky,
but it is made invisible by the clouds.
2. En espaol, invisible quiere decir invisible,
que no se puede ver. En un da nublado,
no se ve el sol. Est ah en el cielo, pero es
invisible porque las nubes no nos dejan verlo.
3. Invisible in English and invisible in Spanish are
invisible. (Point to the nearly hidden sh in the
photo.) You know there is something under the
seabed, but you cannot see it. It is a sh. The
sh was made invisible by its surroundings.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is clues. Say

it with me: clues. Clues are hints or signs.
A detective uses clues to help solve a crime.
When a dog goes to the door and barks, it
is a clue that the dog wants to go out.
2. En espaol, clues quiere decir pistas,
indicios. Un detective usa pistas para resolver
un caso. Que un perro ladre y corra a la puerta
es una pista que quiere salir.
clues. (Point to the sky in the photo.) The sky is
dark. You can tell it is windy too. These are clues
that tell us that a storm is coming.
362
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (b) Corbis.
MOVEMENT
5. Hold up your hands. Now lets all make our
hands invisible. Lets make them visible again!
6. Show your partner a small object. Have your
partner look away. Now make the object
invisible. Switch roles and repeat. At the end,
show each other where the object is. Make it
visible again.
7. Now lets say invisible together three more
times: invisible, invisible, invisible.
Word 2
clues
PARTNER TALK
4. Think of a fruit. Give your partner three clues
about the fruit. Have your partner try to guess
the fruit. Keep giving clues until the fruit is
guessed. Switch roles and repeat.
5. Play the clue guessing game again with your
partner. This time give clues about an animal
that you think of.
6. Now lets say clues together three more times:
clues, clues, clues.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
blend
Word 4
dull
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
blend
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is blend. Say it with

me: blend. A blend is a mix or combination.
Our class is a blend of many different people.
2. En espaol, blend quiere decir mezcla,
combinacin. En nuestro saln hay una
mezcla de diferentes personas.
word blend. (Point to the different cloths in
the photo.) These cloths are a blend, or mix,
of many different colors and patterns.
PARTNER TALK
4. Look around the room. Describe an object
that has a blend of colors or patterns to your
partner. Have your partner guess the object.
Then switch roles and repeat.
5. Tell your partner what foods you would blend
to make a tasty stew or soup.
6. Now lets say blend together three more times:
blend, blend, blend.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is dull. Say it

with me: dull. Dull means boring or plain.
A room that is all grey, with no other colors,
may seem dull. A party with no music or
games may seem dull, too!
2. En espaol, dull quiere decir aburrido o
muy simple. Un cuarto pintado de gris,
sin ningn otro color, puede ser un poco
aburrido. Una esta sin msica ni piata
puede ser aburrida tambin.
word dull. Look at this small pile of sand. It
is all one color and has no interesting shape.
It is plain and dull.
Word 4
dull
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about one object in the
classroom that you think is dull. What does it
look like?
5. Talk with your partner about other words that
mean dull. Then try to think of words that
mean the opposite of dull. (Examples include:
plain, boring, simple, uninteresting; fancy,
colorful, fun, interesting)
6. Now lets say dull together three more times:
dull, dull, dull.
364
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Erica Simone Leeds 2007/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill. (b) The McGraw-Hill Companies Inc./Ken Cavanagh Photographer.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
swift
Word 6
habit
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
swift
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is swift. Say it with

me: swift. Swift means quick or fast. If you go
on a quick walk around the block, it is a swift
walk. A quick or fast runner is a swift runner.
2. En espaol, swift quiere decir rpido, veloz.
Si caminas de prisa por la calle, tu paso es
veloz. Una persona que corre rpidamente es
un corredor veloz.
word swift. This is a racing car. In order to win
a car race, the car must be swift, or fast.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is habit. Say it

with me: habit. A habit is something you do
over and over. A habit is a pattern or routine
you follow. If you do your homework at the
same time every day, it becomes a habit.
2. En espaol, habit quiere decir costumbre,
una cosa que haces una y otra vez, hbito. Si
haces tu tarea a la misma hora todos los das,
se vuelve un hbito hacerla a la misma hora.
3. Habit in English and hbito in Spanish are
366
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Royalty-Free/CORBIS/Corbis. (b) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
4. Take turns walking across the room in a
swift way.
5. Talk with your partner about why someone
might need to be swift. For example, you
need to be a swift runner to win a race.
6. Now lets say swift together three more times:
swift, swift, swift.
Word 6
habit
PARTNER TALK
word habit. These children always brush their
teeth after they eat. This is a good habit.
Brushing their teeth after eating is a routine
they follow.
5. Tell your partner about some good habits you
have, such as brushing your teeth after eating.
6. Tell your partner about a bad habit you have
or you have seen people do that you think
should stop, such as biting your ngernails.
7. Now lets say habit together three more times:
habit, habit, habit.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
understand
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
understand
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is understand. Say

it with me: understand. When you understand
something, you know about it and are able to
explain it to someone else. If you know how
to add two numbers, you understand addition.
When you understand addition, you can
explain how to add.
2. En espaol, to understand quiere decir
entender, conocer bien una materia.
Cuando entiendes algo, lo sabes y lo puedes
explicar a otra persona. Si sabes sumar, puedes
explicarle a otra persona cmo hacerlo.
word understand. The teacher just taught
these children something in school. They raise
their hands to answer a question, because
they understand what they learned.
368
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Andersen Ross/Blend Images/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Explain something that you understand to
your partner. You can explain how to add two
numbers, or tell about a book you read.
5. Look at the photo again. Talk with your
partner about why children in school raise
their hands when they want to answer a
question. Give reasons to show that you
understand why. (Examples include: so the
teacher knows that they know the answer;
so everyone does not talk at once)
6. Now lets say understand together three more
times: understand, understand, understand.
Word 1
walk through
Word 2
to be through
Word 1
walk through
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use walk through to describe

walking in a place. Say it with me: walk
through. Walk through means to stroll in a
place from one end to another. On warm
days I like to walk through town.
2. En espaol, to walk through quiere decir dar
un paseo por. Cuando hace buen tiempo, me
gusta dar un paseo por la ciudad.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase walk
through. (Point to the family). The family
walks through the park.
4. I will describe some actions. After each say

You are walking through the
.
I am strolling all around the school.
I am going from one end of the store to
the other.
I am walking with my friend and looking
all around his house.
5. Ill say some words. If the word names
something you can walk through, say You
can walk through it. If not say, You cannot
walk through it.
a park
a mall
a wall
a room
a puppy
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: walk
through, walk through, walk through.
Word 2
to be through
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use to be through to tell about

when we have completed something. Say it
with me: to be through. To be through means
to be nished or done. I will be through
with my work in ten minutes.
2. En espaol, to be through quiere decir
acabar, terminar algo. Dentro de diez
minutos terminar mi trabajo.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase to be
through. It shows a nished or completed
drawing. The boy is through with this
drawing.
4. I will tell you about some actions. Say, You

are through, or You are not through, to
tell about the actions.
I nished taking the test.
I painted the whole room.
I completed the book I was reading.
I still have to nish my lunch.
5. I will say some words. If they mean almost the
same as to be through, say to be through.
If not say nothing.
to be done
to be completed
to begin
to be nished
to be happy
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: to be
through, to be through, to be through.
370
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Archive Japan/PunchStock. (b) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages
Word 3
in plain sight
Word 4
plain object
Word 3
in plain sight
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use in plain sight to tell about

things we can see. Say it with me: in plain
sight. In plain sight means clear or easy to
see or notice. The playground I am going to
is in plain sight.
2. En espaol, in plain sight quiere decir que es
fcil de ver, en plena vista. Voy a un parque
que est en plena vista.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase in plain
sight. It shows a cheetah that can be easily
seen. The cheetah is not hiding: it is in plain
sight.
4. Ill name some objects in the room. If the

object is in plain sight say, Its in plain sight.
If you can not see it say, Its not in plain
sight.
my desk
my comb
the chalkboard
your coat
5. Ill say some sentences. Repeat each sentence,
replacing the words easily seen with in plain
sight.
The kangaroo was easily seen.
The pimple on her face was easily seen.
My backpack in the closet is not easily seen.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: in
plain sight, in plain sight, in plain sight.
Word 4
plain object
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use plain object to tell about

objects that are not fancy. Say it with me:
plain object. Plain object means something
that is undecorated or simple. There is a
plain object on my desk. It is a plain sheet of
paper.
2. En espaol, plain object quiere decir una cosa
sencilla, sin lujos ni decoraciones. Hay una
cosa sencilla sobre mi escritorio. Es una simple
hoja de papel.
3. This picture demonstrates the words plain
object. It shows a plain object. (Point to the
pizza.) The plain pizza has no toppings. It only
has cheese and sauce.
4. Think about what might be on a plain

sandwich. Describe a plain sandwich to your
partner. Then talk about how you can make
the sandwich different so that it is not plain.
5. Tell your partner some words that mean
almost the same as plain. Then tell some
words that mean the opposite of plain.
(Examples include: the same: simple,
undecorated; opposite: fancy, decorated)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: plain
object, plain object, plain object.
372
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Jeremy Woodhouse/Getty Images. (b) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 4
Dot and Jabber and the Big Bug Mystery
y, hide, hop,
run away, sting, crawl
hide
hop
run away
sting
crawl
ROUTINE
373
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) JUPITERIMAGES/ Polka Dot/Alamy Images. (tc) Jupiterimages/Brand X/Alamy Images. (tr) Jupiterimages/Pixland/Alamy Images.
(bl) James Hardy/PhotoAlto/Alamy Images. (bm) Ianni Dimitrov/Alamy Images. (br) ImageState/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
daydream
Unit 6 Week 5 Super Oscar
Word 2
cancel
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
daydream
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is daydream. Say it

with me: daydream. To daydream means to
think about something you wish for or hope
for. When it is cold and rainy outside, you
might daydream about a warm, sunny day at
the beach.
2. En espaol, to daydream quiere decir soar
despierto sobre algo que deseas. En un da
fro y lluvioso es posible que suees despierto
con un da clido y asoleado en la playa.
word daydream. Have you ever daydreamed
in class? This boy has. He is looking into
space, like he is deep in thought, but he is not
working like the girl behind him. Maybe he
is daydreaming about being outside playing
soccer.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is cancel. Say

it with me: cancel. To cancel means to call
off or stop. If you are supposed to play a
baseball game and it starts to rain, you may
cancel, or call off, the game. If it snows a lot,
school may be cancelled or called off.
2. En espaol, to cancel quiere decir cancelar,
anular o dejar de hacer. Si empieza a llover
durante un partido de bisbol, se puede
cancelar el juego. Se pueden cancelar las
clases durante una tormenta de nieve.
3. To cancel in English and cancelar in Spanish
word cancel. Look at how sad these players
look. Thats because their game was canceled.
They thought they were going to play, but the
game was called off.
376
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (b) BananaStock/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Lets all daydream about a special place you
would like to visit. Then tell your partner
about your daydream.
5. Now lets daydream about actually meeting
a famous person you would like to meet.
Then tell your partner what happened in your
daydream.
6. Now lets say daydream together three more
times: daydream, daydream, daydream.
Word 2
cancel
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner about something you
were going to that was canceled. Was it a
party, school, a visit, a show? Tell why it was
canceled.
6. Act out with your partner how you would
cancel an appointment with a doctor or
dentist. Pretend you are talking on the phone
to cancel the appointment. Use the sentence
starter: Im sorry, but I have to cancel the
appointment because
.
7. Now lets say cancel together three more
times: cancel, cancel, cancel.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
nutritious
Word 4
plentiful
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
nutritious
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is nutritious. Say

it with me: nutritious. Food that is nutritious
is healthy and good for you. Nutritious food
has vitamins that we need to stay healthy.
Vegetables are nutritious. Candy is not
nutritious.
2. En espaol, nutritious quiere decir nutritivo.
La comida nutritiva tiene vitaminas que
necesitamos para mantenernos sanos. Las
verduras son nutritivas. Los dulces no son
nutritivos.
3. Nutritious in English and nutritivo in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is plentiful. Say

it with me: plentiful. If something is plentiful,
there is a lot of it. There is enough for
everyone. In the library, books are plentiful.
2. En espaol, plentiful quiere decir abundante,
que hay en gran cantidad. Hay una cantidad
abundante de libros en la biblioteca.
word plentiful. Look at all of the food on the
table. At this feast, food will be plentiful.
There will be plenty for everyone.
378
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Brand X Pictures/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
word nutritious. (Point to the different foods
in the photo.) These foods are all nutritious.
The vegetables are nutritious, and so is the
orange juice. We eat nutritious foods to stay
healthy and to help us grow.
5. Take turns with your partner naming
nutritious foods and drinks. (Examples include:
spinach, oranges, milk, sh)
6. Tell your partner why it is important to eat
nutritious foods. Use the sentence starter:
It is important to eat nutritious foods
because
.
7. Now lets say nutritious together three more
times: nutritious, nutritious, nutritious.
Word 4
plentiful
PARTNER TALK
4. Draw a picture of something that is plentiful.
It might be something in a store. Label your
picture with the sentence:
is
plentiful. Tell your partner about your picture.
5. Tell your partner about a place where friends
are plentiful. (Examples include: a party, in
school, in your neighborhood)
6. Now lets say plentiful together three more
times: plentiful, plentiful, plentiful.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
stubborn
Word 6
visit
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
stubborn
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is stubborn. Say it

with me: stubborn. Someone who is stubborn
refuses to change, listen, or move. A dog acts
stubborn when it will not move or go for a
walk. A stubborn child does not go to bed
when he or she is supposed to.
2. En espaol, stubborn quiere decir terco, que
se niega a cambiar, escuchar o mover. Un
perro terco se niega a moverse. Un nio terco
desobedece a sus padres cuando le dicen que
se acueste.
word stubborn. This boy is stubborn. He will
not listen. He does not want to do what he is
being told to do. He does not want to change.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is visit. Say it

with me: visit. To visit means to go to see
someone for a little while, to spend some time
with someone. When someone is ill you can
visit, or go to see the person in the hospital.
2. En espaol, to visit quiere decir visitar, ir a
ver a alguien un rato. Puedes visitar a un
enfermo en el hospital.
3. To visit in English and visitar in Spanish are
380
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Fancy/Veer/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill. (b) BananaStock/Alamy Images.
MOVEMENT
4. One partner asks another to come with him
or her. The other partner acts stubborn and
refuses to go. Then switch roles and repeat.
5. Lets all use our faces and gestures to show
what we look like when we are stubborn.
6. Now lets say stubborn together three more
times: stubborn, stubborn, stubborn.
Word 6
visit
PARTNER TALK
visit. (Point to the children in the photo.) These
children are going to visit their grandparents.
They are going to spend time with their
grandparents. Everyone is happy about the visit.
5. Tell your partner about a visit you went on.
Where did you go? Who did you see?
6. Tell your partner about someone who visited
you. Describe the visit to your partner.
7. Now lets say visit together three more times:
visit, visit, visit.
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
fantastic
Key Vocabulary
Word 7
fantastic
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is fantastic. Say it

with me: fantastic. Fantastic means terric,
great, better than usual. A trip that is lots of
fun and exciting is a fantastic trip. If you get
100 on your test, it is a fantastic grade.
2. En espaol, fantastic quiere decir fantstico,
magnco, fabuloso. Un viaje divertido y
emocionante es un viaje fantstico. Si sacas
100 porciento de las respuestas bien en un
examen, sacas una nota fantstica.
3. Fantastic in English and fantstico in
languages.
382
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) MELBA PHOTO AGENCY/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
the word fantastic. This canyon is beautiful
and unusual. It is not plain or ordinary.
It is fantastic.
5. Tell your partner about a fantastic meal you
had. What did you eat? Where was the meal?
Who was there? What made it so fantastic?
6. Tell your partner what the most fantastic
movie or TV program you ever saw was. Tell
why it was fantastic.
7. Now lets say fantastic together three more
times: fantastic, fantastic, fantastic.
Word 1
daydream
Word 2
to dream for
Word 1
daydream
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use daydream to describe

thinking about something. Say it with me:
daydream. Daydream means to have pleasant
thoughts, to not pay attention because your
are thinking about something pleasant, to
imagine. In cold weather, I like to daydream
about going to the beach in the summer.
2. En espaol, to daydream quiere decir soar
despierto; distraerse con pensamientos
agradables. Cuando hace fro, sueo
despierto con ir a la playa en el verano.
3. This picture demonstrates the word daydream.
It shows a girl daydreaming about something
while she is in school. Is it good to daydream
in school? Why or why not?
4. Tell your partner about a daydream you have

had. What do you like to daydream, or think
about during the day?
5. Daydream about meeting someone famous
who you would like to meet. Then tell your
partner about your daydream.
daydream, daydream, daydream.
Word 2
to dream for
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use to dream for to tell about

wishing. Say it with me: to dream for. To
dream for means to wish for or to hope for.
I dream for a chance to star in a movie.
2. En espaol, to dream for quiere decir anhelar
o desear algo. Yo anhelo ser una estrella de
cine.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase to dream
for. It shows a boy looking in a toy store
window. He is dreaming for a toy he wants.
Which toy do you think he is dreaming for?
4. Tell your partner about a toy you dream

for. Look at the picture to help you. Use the
sentence: I dream for a
.
5. Think of something you would like to do.
For example, would you like to meet the
president? Tell your partner what you dream
for using this sentence starter: I dream for a
chance to
.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: dream
for, dream for, dream for.
384
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Tim Hall/Getty Images.
Word 3
around
Word 4
round
Word 3
around
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use around to describe where.

Say it with me: around. Around means from
one place to another, surrounding a place or
thing. I wear a belt around my waist.
2. En espaol, around quiere decir alrededor.
Uso un cinturn alrededor de mi cintura.
3. This picture demonstrates the word around.
It shows people who are standing around the
building to watch the parade.
4. Lets pretend we are in a parade. Ill be the

leader. Follow me as we walk around the
room.
5. Lets walk around our desks. Walk around your
desk and Ill walk around mine.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: around,
around, around.
Word 4
round
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use round to tell about shape.

Say it with me: round. Round means the
shape of a circle. A paper plate is round.
A coin is round.
2. En espaol, round quiere decir redondo;
con forma de crculo. Un plato de cartn es
redondo. Una moneda es redonda.
3. This picture demonstrates the word round. It
shows a round pizza. The pizza has the shape
of a circle. It is round.
4. Ill hold up some objects. Say round if they

are round, say not round if they are not
round. (Hold up various objects that are and
are not round, such as coins, an eraser, a
paper plate, counters, a pen.)
5. I am going to tell you about an object. If it
can be round, say. It can be round. If it can
not be round say, It cannot be round.
It does not have any corners.
It has straight sides.
It looks like a circle.
It looks like a square.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: round,
round, round.
386
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 5
Super Oscar
picnic, party, eld trip,

project, lesson, parade
picnic
party
eld trip
project
lesson
parade
ROUTINE
387
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Digital Vision/PunchStock. (tc) Purestock/PunchStock. (tr) PhotoLink/Getty Images.
(bl) Jupiterimages/Brand X/Alamy Images. (bm) BananaStock/PunchStock. (br) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Getty Images.
Contents
English Language Development

Unit 1
Unit 4
Week 1 ELD Vocabulary .....................................................................389

Content Words ......................................................................391
Content Words ......................................................................395
Content Words ......................................................................399
Content Words ......................................................................403
Week 5 ELD Vocabulary .................................................................... 405
Content Words ......................................................................407

Content Words ......................................................................451
Content Words ......................................................................455
Content Words ......................................................................459
Content Words ......................................................................463
Content Words ......................................................................467
Unit 2
Unit 5

Content Words ...................................................................... 411
Week 2 ELD Vocabulary ..................................................................... 413
Content Words ......................................................................415
Week 3 ELD Vocabulary ..................................................................... 417
Content Words ......................................................................419
Content Words ......................................................................423
Content Words ......................................................................427

Content Words ......................................................................471
Content Words ......................................................................475
Content Words ......................................................................479
Content Words ......................................................................483
Content Words ......................................................................487
Unit 3
Unit 6

Content Words ......................................................................431
Content Words ......................................................................435
Content Words ......................................................................439
Content Words ..................................................................... 443
Content Words ......................................................................447

Content Words ......................................................................491
Content Words ......................................................................495
Content Words ......................................................................499
Content Words ......................................................................503
Content Words ......................................................................507
ELD Vocabulary Words
Word 1
special
Unit 1 Week 1 I Can!
Word 2
different
Word 1
special
Unit 1 Week 1 I Can!
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is special. Say it

with me: special. Special means out of the
ordinary, important. When something or
someone is special to you, they are important.
This book is special. It is my favorite book.
2. En espaol, special quiere decir fuera de
lo normal, importante, especial. Cuando
alguien o algo es especial, te parece que es
importante. Este libro es especial para m. Es
mi libro preferido.
3. Special in English and especial in Spanish are
the word special. (Point to the birthday girl
in the photo.) It is this girls birthday. It is a
special day for her. This is her party, so she is
special because she is the birthday girl!
PARTNER TALK
5. Turn to your partner and talk about a special
toy you have. Tell each other why that toy is
special to you.
6. Now tell your partner about a special person
in your life. Think about why that person is
special. Tell your partner what that person
does that is special.
7. Now lets say special together three more
times: special, special, special.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is different. Say

it with me: different. Different means not the
same or not alike. There are many different
kinds of animals. When we go to the zoo we
see different animals. For example, we may
see elephants, tigers, and lions.
2. En espaol, different quiere decir que
no es igual o parecido a otro, diferente.
Hay muchas clases diferentes de animales.
Cuando vamos al zoolgico, vemos diferentes
animales. Por ejemplo, vemos elefantes, tigres
y leones.
3. Different in English and diferente in Spanish
different
PARTNER TALK
the word different. (Point to the children in
the photo.) See the children in this picture.
They all look different. They are all wearing
different clothes. How else are they different?
5. Each of you draw a picture of yourself. Then
look at the pictures you drew. How are they
different?
6. One partner will tell the other about a game
you like to play. Then the other partner will
talk about a different game. How are the
games different?
7. Now lets say different together three more
times: different, different, different.
390
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PictureQuest/Jupiterimages. (b) Rob Van Petten/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 1 What People and Animals Need
energy, air,
space, shelter
energy
air
space
shelter
ROUTINE
4. Explain how these four words t into a group, or category. During
5. Point out the following cognates: energa, aire, espacio.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Lew Robertson/Corbis. (tr) Elmer Frederick Fischer/Corbis.
(bl) Creatas/PunchStock. (br) Steve Hamblin/Alamy Images.
391
Word 1
pretend
Word 2
applaud
Unit 1 Week 2 Pat and Sam
Word 1
pretend
Unit 1 Week 2 Pat and Sam
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is pretend. Say it

with me: pretend. Pretend means to make
believe or act out. Jamie likes to pretend he
is a super hero. Hes not really a superhero,
but he has fun acting like he is.
2. En espaol, to pretend quiere decir usar la
imaginacin, actuar o hacerse pasar por algo.
A Jaime le gusta imaginar que es un super
hroe. l no es realmente un super hroe, pero
se divierte hacindose pasar por uno.
the word pretend. (Point to the girls in the
photo.) These girls like to pretend they are
at a tea party. They are not really drinking
tea. They are pretending. Theyre acting like
theyre drinking real tea.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is applaud. Say

it with me: applaud. Applaud means to clap
at the end of a performance. When we go
to a show, we applaud at the end to let the
performers know we liked the show. Lets
all applaud together. (Demonstrate clapping
quietly.)
2. En espaol, to applaud quiere decir unir
las manos para que hagan un sonido,
aplaudir. Normalmente se aplaude al nal
de una presentacin. Se aplaude para que
los intrpretes o artistas sepan que nos ha
gustado su presentacin. Aplaudamos juntos.
(Demuestre apluadir suavemente.)
3. To applaud in English and aplaudir in Spanish
394
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbroker/Getty Images. (b) BananaStock/PictureQuest/Jupiterimages.
MOVEMENT
4. Think about your favorite animal. Lets take
turns pretending to be our favorite animal.
The rest of us will guess which animal you are
pretending to be.
5. Now lets all pretend we are playing different
instruments. Ill call out an instrument, and
you pretend to play it. (Call out names of
instruments such as piano, guitar, violin,
trumpet, drums.)
6. Now lets say pretend together three more
times: pretend, pretend, pretend.
Word 2
applaud
MOVEMENT
the word applaud. (Point to the people
clapping in the photo.) See the people in this
picture. They enjoyed the show. Each one of
them applauds. They clap their hands to show
they liked the show.
5. Im going to pretend to be a singer. Watch my
performance. When Im nished everyone can
applaud.
6. Now its your turn. Take turns pretending
to put on a show. You can pretend to play
an instrument, sing, or dance. When you
are nished we will all applaud for you.
(Have children take turns performing and
applauding.)
7. Now lets say applaud together three more
times: applaud, applaud, applaud.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 2 The First People of Australia
Australia, continent,
people, nature
Australia
continent
people
nature
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: continente, naturaleza.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Jennifer Thermes/Getty Images. (tr) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
(bl) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (br) Robert Glusic/Getty Images.
395
Word 1
proud
Unit 1 Week 3 We Can Grow
Word 2
enjoy
Word 1
proud
Unit 1 Week 3 We Can Grow
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is proud. Say it

with me: proud. Proud means pleased about
something good you or someone else has
done. You should be proud of your good
grades in school.
2. En espaol, proud quiere decir agradado por
algo que t u otra persona ha hecho bien,
orgulloso. Deberan estar orgullosos de sus
buenas calicaciones en sus clases.
the word proud. (Point to the father in the
photo.) This dad is proud of his sons. See the
smile on his face. He feels very pleased with
his sons. He is proud. What do you think they
did to make their father look so proud?
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is enjoy. Say it

with me: enjoy. Enjoy means to have fun or
to like a lot. If you like to read, you enjoy
reading. If you like to ride a bike, you enjoy
riding a bike. If you like tacos, you enjoy
tacos.
2. En espaol, to enjoy quiere decir divertirse
o gustar mucho, disfrutar. Si te gusta leer,
disfrutas la lectura. Si te gusta montar en
bici, disfrutas montar en bici. Si te gustan los
tacos, disfrutas comer tacos.
word enjoy. (Point to the children in the
photo.) These children are having fun. They
enjoy playing together. How can you tell they
are enjoying themselves? (They are smiling.)
398
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock. (b) ImageState/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Think about something you did that made you
feel proud. Tell your partner about it. Use the
sentence starter: I felt proud when I
. (Examples include: got a good grade,
won a race, learned how to ride a bike, read a
whole book.)
5. Now think about something you want to learn
to do. Tell your partner about how proud
you will be when you learn. Use this sentence
starter: I will be very proud when I learn to
.
6. Now lets say proud together three more
times: proud, proud, proud.
Word 2
enjoy
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk to your partner about what you enjoy
at school. Do you enjoy playing outside? Do
you enjoy art or computer time? Use the word
enjoy in your conversation.
5. Tell your partner about a person you enjoy
being with. What do you enjoy doing with this
person?
6. Now lets say enjoy together three more times:
enjoy, enjoy, enjoy.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 3 Rights and Responsibilities
citizens, rights,
responsibilities, free
citizens
rights
responsibilities
free
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: responsabilidades.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) S. Meltzer/PhotoLink/Getty Images. (tr) Momentum Creative Group/Alamy Images.
(bl) Creatas/PunchStock. (br) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock.
399
Word 1
responsibility
Unit 1 Week 4 Kim
Word 2
cuddly
Word 1
responsibility
Unit 1 Week 4 Kim
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is responsibility. Say

it with me: responsibility. Responsibility means
your job or something you are supposed
to do. It is your responsibility to do your
homework. It is my responsibility to teach.
2. En espaol, responsibility quiere decir
un deber o algo que se tiene que hacer,
responsabilidad. Es su responsabilidad hacer
sus tareas. Es mi responsabilidad ensearles.
3. Responsibility in English and responsibilidad
languages.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is cuddly. Say

it with me: cuddly. Cuddly means soft and
huggable, nice to hold because it is soft and
warm. Stuffed animals are cuddly. Kittens are
cuddly, but you have to be careful not to hug
them too tightly.
2. En espaol, cuddly quiere decir que es suave
y que dan ganas de abrazar. Los muecos de
peluche son suaves y clidos. Te dan ganas
de abrazarlos. Los gatitos tambin son suaves
pero tienes que tener cuidado, pues no los
puedes abrazar con mucha fuerza.
the word cuddly. (Point to the teddy bears in
the photo.) See the teddy bear the little girl
is holding. The teddy bear is cuddly. It is soft
and the girl likes to hug it.
402
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) PhotoLink/Getty Images. (b) CLEO Photo/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
word responsibility. (Point to the boy in
the photo.) This boy is taking care of his
responsibility. It is his job, or responsibility,
to throw out the plastic jugs. It is everyones
responsibility to recycle plastic containers.
5. Tell your partner about one responsibility you
have at home. Is it your responsibility to clean
your room, take out the garbage, or help set
the table?
6. Talk with your partner about the different
kinds of responsibilities you have in school.
Choose one and take turns to complete the
sentence: In school it is our responsibility to
.
7. Now lets say responsibility together three
more times: responsibility, responsibility,
responsibility.
Word 2
cuddly
PARTNER TALK
4. Think about a cuddly toy you have or once
had. Describe it to your partner.
5. Take turns naming things that are cuddly.
See how many you can name. Start with the
sentence: Teddy bears are cuddly. Add on
each item to the sentence: Teddy bears and
are cuddly. (Examples include puppies,
kittens, stuffed bunnies, pillows, and soft
blankets.)
6. Now lets say cuddly together three more
times: cuddly, cuddly, cuddly.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 4 Traditions We Share
tradition, Thanksgiving,
feast, cultures
tradition
Thanksgiving
feast
cultures
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: tradicin, esta, culturas.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (tr) The Granger Collection, New York.
(bl) Kevin Sanchez/Cole Group/Getty Images. (br) Erica Simone Leeds/McGraw-Hill Companies.
403
Word 1
cooperate
Unit 1 Week 5 We Play Sports
Word 2
athlete
Word 1
cooperate
Unit 1 Week 5 We Play Sports
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is cooperate. Say it

with me: cooperate. To cooperate means to
work together well. When you play a game,
you need to cooperate. You need to take turns
and play by the rules.
2. En espaol, to cooperate quiere trabajar con
otras personas, ayudarse, cooperar. Cuando
juegas con otros, tienen que cooperar. Todos
los que juegan tienen que esperar su turno y
seguir las reglas del juego.
3. To cooperate in English and cooperar in
languages.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is athlete. Say it

with me: athlete. An athlete is a person who
plays sports. To be a good athlete you need
to stay in shape. There are many different
kinds of athletes, such as baseball players,
swimmers, and basketball players.
2. En espaol, athlete quiere decir una persona
que juega un deporte, atleta. Hay muchos
tipos de atletas distintos, como los jugadores
de bisbol, los nadadores y los jugadores de
baloncesto.
3. Athlete in English and atleta in Spanish are
406
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock. (b) PhotoLink/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
word cooperate. (Point to the children in the
photo.) These children are making a human
pyramid. They all need to do things together.
They need to cooperate so that they dont fall
down.
5. Lets look back at the picture. Tell your
partner how these children are cooperating.
What is something they all must do together?
(Examples include: stay still, kneel, balance)
6. Talk about why it is important to cooperate
in our class. Tell how we all cooperate. What
would happen if we did not cooperate?
(If we didnt cooperate, we would not learn,
or people could get hurt.)
7. Now lets say cooperate together three more
times: cooperate, cooperate, cooperate.
Word 2
athlete
PARTNER TALK
word athlete. (Point to the racers in the
photo.) See the racers in this picture. They are
both athletes. They both are ready to start the
running race.
5. Take turns naming different kinds of
athletes. How many can you and your partner
name?
6. Think about being an athlete. What would
you need to do to be a good athlete? Talk
to your partner about it. (Examples include:
exercise, train, eat right, practice)
7. Now lets say athlete together three more
times: athlete, athlete, athlete.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 5 Independence Day
independence, freedom,
declaration, government
independence
freedom
declaration
government
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: independencia, declaracin, gobierno.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Comstock/PunchStock. (tr) Rob Melnychuk/Getty Images.
(bl) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (br) Hisham Ibrahim/Getty Images.
407
Word 1
patient
Unit 2 Week 1 Two Little Bears
Word 2
active
Word 1
patient
Unit 2 Week 1 Two Little Bears
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is patient. Say it

with me: patient. Patient means able to wait
without getting annoyed, being calm. When
you are patient, you allow others to take their
time without becoming angry or rushed.
2. En espaol, patient quiere decir que puede
esperar sin fastidiarse o perder la calma,
paciente. Cuando eres paciente permites
que otros se tomen su tiempo sin enojarte ni
apresurarte.
3. Patient in English and paciente in Spanish are
PARTNER TALK
the word patient. (Point to the grandparents
in the photo.) These grandparents are letting
their children take their time to do their
work. The grandparents are patient with the
children.
5. Tell your partner about a time you had to be
patient. Use the sentence starter: I had to be
patient when
.
6. Tell your partner how you can tell if someone
is patient. How do they act? What do they do?
(Examples include: They are quiet; They are
calm; They do not get angry.)
7. Now lets say patient together three more
times: patient, patient, patient.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is active. Say it

with me: active. Active means lively, on the
go. You guys are usually very active when we
go out for recess.
2. En espaol, active quiere decir animado,
haciendo algo, activo. Ustedes normalmente
son muy activos cuando salen al recreo.
the word active. (Point to the children in the
photo.) See the children in this picture. They
are all playing games. They are all active.
Word 2
active
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a place where you like
to be active. What do you like to do there?
(Examples include the gym, the playground,
and the park.)
5. Talk about what someone might be doing
if they are active. Then talk about what
someone might be doing if they are not
active. (Examples include: activemoving,
running, jumping; not activesitting still,
resting, not moving)
6. Now lets say active together three more
times: active, active, active.
410
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Dynamic Graphics/Creatas Images/PictureQuest/Jupiterimages. (b) Lars Niki/McGraw-Hill Companies.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 1 Going to School
classroom, tools,
abacus, computer
classroom
tools
abacus
computer
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: clase, baco, computador.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Dynamic Graphics/Jupiterimages. (tr) Studiohio/McGraw-Hill Companies.
(bl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
411
Word 1
delicious
Unit 2 Week 2 The Farm
Word 2
healthy
Word 1
delicious
Unit 2 Week 2 The Farm
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is delicious. Say it

with me: delicious. Delicious means tasty or
yummy. Something that tastes really good
is delicious. The pizza I ate last night was
delicious. The juicy orange I had for dessert
was delicious, too!
2. En espaol, delicious quiere decir que sabe a
rico, delicioso. La pizza que me com anoche
estaba deliciosa. La naranja jugosa que me
com de postre tambin estaba deliciosa.
3. Delicious in English and delicioso in Spanish
the word delicious. (Point to the breakfast
foods in the photo.) Look at the little
blueberry pancakes. They look fresh, tasty,
and moist. They probably taste delicious.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is healthy. Say

it with me: healthy. Healthy means good for
your body. Fruits and vegetables are healthy
foods.
2. En espaol, healthy quiere decir bueno para
el cuerpo, saludable. Las frutas y las verduras
son alimentos saludables.
the word healthy. (Point to each type of food
in the photo as you name it.) See the lemons.
Lemons are healthy. See the limes. Limes are
healthy. These are oranges and these are
tomatoes. They are all healthy foods. Eating
lots of fruits like these will help keep your
body healthy and strong.
414
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Matthew Klein/Corbis. (b) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner some foods you think are
delicious. Use the sentence: I think
is
delicious.
6. Think about a delicious meal you had. Tell
your partner what made the meal delicious to
you.
7. Now lets say delicious together three more
times: delicious, delicious, delicious.
Word 2
healthy
PARTNER TALK
4. Take turns naming as many healthy foods as
you can. Use the picture to help.
5. Tell your partner about a food that you think
is both delicious and healthy.
6. Now lets say healthy together three more
times: healthy, healthy, healthy.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 2 Living in Alaska
sun, dark, cold, ice
sun
dark
cold
ice
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: sol.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) DAJ/Getty Images. (tr) Radius Images/Alamy Images.
(bl) DynamicGraphics/age fotostock. (br) Corbis/Corbis.
415
Word 1
helpful
Unit 2 Week 3 Use a Map
Word 2
adventure
Word 1
helpful
Unit 2 Week 3 Use a Map
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is helpful. Say it

with me: helpful. Helpful means supportive,
ready to give aid to someone. The boy was
helpful by carrying the womans groceries for
her.
2. En espaol, helpful quiere decir que apoya o
que ayuda a otros, amable. El nio amable le
ayud a la seora a llevar sus bolsas al carro.
the word helpful. (Point to the ofcer holding
the map in the photo.) This ofcer is being
helpful by showing the people directions on
the map. A map is helpful to use when you
are lost.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is adventure.

Say it with me: adventure. Adventure means
an exciting event or activity. Riding on a
roller coaster is an adventure. It can be a scary
adventure for some people. It can be a fun
adventure for others.
2. En espaol, adventure quiere decir un evento
o actividad emocionante, una aventura.
Montar en una montaa rusa es una aventura.
Puede asustar a algunas personas, pero otras
disfrutan de la aventura.
3. Adventure in English and aventura in Spanish
418
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages. (b) Javier Pierini/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a time someone was
helpful to you. How were they helpful? What
did they do?
5. Suppose you saw someone in a store fall
down. How could you be helpful? Tell your
partner what you would do to be helpful.
6. Now lets say helpful together three more
times: helpful, helpful, helpful.
Word 2
adventure
PARTNER TALK
the word adventure. (Point to the man in the
kayak.) See this man. He is riding through
the white waters of a raging river. It looks
exciting. It is an adventure.
5. Take turns telling your partner about an
adventure you saw on television or in the
movies. Describe the adventures to each other.
6. Have you ever been on an adventure? Would
you like to go on an adventure? Tell your
partner why or why not.
7. Now lets say adventure together three more
times: adventure, adventure, adventure.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 3 Find an Address
neighborhood, address, absolute

location, relative location
neighborhood
address
absolute location
relative location
ROUTINE
419
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Carl Johan Ronn/Getty Images. (tr) PhotoLink/Getty Images.
(bl) Andersen Ross/Getty Images. (br) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Getty Images.
Word 1
tasty
Unit 2 Week 4 The Three Bears
Word 2
comfortable
Word 1
tasty
Unit 2 Week 4 The Three Bears
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is tasty. Say it with

me: tasty. Tasty means delicious or yummy.
After eating supper some people like to have
dessert. What tasty dessert do you like?
2. En espaol, tasty quiere decir delicioso, que
sabe a rico, sabroso. Despus de la cena, a
algunas personas les gusta comer un postre.
Qu postre sabroso te gusta a ti?
the word tasty. (Point to the girl in the photo.)
This girl is eating something tasty. You can tell
that it is tasty because she has taken quite a
few bites. What tasty food is this girl eating?
(an apple)
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is comfortable.

Say it with me: comfortable. Comfortable
means feeling at ease, feeling relaxed. My
big soft chair is very comfortable.
2. En espaol, comfortable quiere decir que
se siente agradable y relajante, cmodo,
confortable. Mi silln grande y suave es muy
confortable.
3. Comfortable in English and confortable in
languages.
the word comfortable. (Point to the girls in the
bed.) See these girls. They are both relaxing in
bed and reading. They are comfortable in the
soft, warm bed.
422
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we are eating a tasty piece of
watermelon. Lets act out how we would eat
it. (Demonstrate taking big bites and licking
your lips)
5. Now lets act out what we would do after
we ate a tasty piece of watermelon. (Act out
rubbing tummy and saying mmmmmm.)
6. Now lets say tasty together three more times:
tasty, tasty, tasty.
Word 2
comfortable
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner where you feel most
comfortable when doing your homework.
Why are you comfortable in that place?
6. Tell your partner about a comfortable piece
of clothing you like to wear. What makes the
clothing so comfortable?
7. Now lets say comfortable together three more
times: comfortable, comfortable, comfortable.
pilgrim, mountainside,
liberty, pride
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 4 America
pilgrim
mountainside
liberty
pride
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: peregrino, libertad.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) The Granger Collection, New York. (tr) Image Ideas/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock. (br) Photodisc/Getty Images.
423
Word 1
disappointed
Unit 2 Week 5 Trish Gets a Pet
Word 2
thrilled
Word 1
disappointed
Unit 2 Week 5 Trish Gets a Pet
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is disappointed.

Say it with me: disappointed. You feel
disappointed when you are sad because
something you hoped for or expected did not
happen. Ellen was disappointed when she
found out she could not go to the party.
2. En espaol, disappointed se dice
decepcionado. Uno se siente decepcionado
cuando lo que uno esperaba que ocurriera no
ocurre. Helena se sinti decepcionada cuando
se enter que no podra ir a la esta.
the word disappointed. (Point to the soccer
player in the photo.) Look at the soccer
players face. You can tell he is disappointed.
Something he hoped would happen did not
happen. Why do you think he is disappointed?
(His team lost the game.)
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is thrilled. Say it

with me: thrilled. Thrilled means feeling very
excited or happy about something. Thrilled
is the opposite of disappointed. Ellen was
thrilled when the time for the party changed.
She got to go after all!
2. En espaol, thrilled quiere decir que se
siente emocionado o muy contento por algo,
ilusionado. Estar ilusionado es el sentimiento
opuesto a estar decepcionado. Helena se
ilusion cuando se enter que cambiaron la
hora de la esta. Al n s pudo ir!
the word thrilled. (Point to the children in the
photo.) See how happy they look. They are
having fun on the beach. They are thrilled to
be together.
426
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a time you were
disappointed in school. What did you hope
would happen? Why were you disappointed?
5. What helps you feel better when you are
disappointed? Pretend your partner is
disappointed about something. Try to help
him or her feel better. (Examples include: Im
sorry; It will be okay; Youll do better next
time.)
6. Now lets say disappointed together three
more times: disappointed, disappointed,
disappointed.
Word 2
thrilled
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a time you were
thrilled in school. What did you hope would
happen? Why were you thrilled when it did
happen?
5. What can you say to someone who is thrilled?
Pretend something wonderful has happened
to your partner. What will you say? (Examples
include: Im happy for you; Congratulations;
Im thrilled, too!)
6. Now lets say thrilled together three more
times: thrilled, thrilled, thrilled.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 5 What Does the Sun Do?
condensation, water vapor,

water cycle, clouds
condensation
water vapor
water cycle
clouds
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: condensacin.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) David Young-Wolff/PhotoEdit. (tr) Eiichi Onodera/Getty Images.
(bl) DK Limited/Corbis. (br) Ryan McVay/Getty Images.
427
Word 1
upset
Unit 3 Week 1 We Are Late!
Word 2
unexpected
Word 1
upset
Unit 3 Week 1 We Are Late!
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is upset. Say it with

me: upset. Upset means unhappy because
of something that has happened. When
you are upset you might be sad, angry, or
disappointed. Jared was upset when he did
not make the basketball team.
2. En espaol, upset quiere decir que no est
contento por lo que ha pasado, disgustado.
Cuando ests disgustado, te puedes sentir
triste, enojado o decepcionado. Jairo se sinti
disgustado cuando se enter que no haba
sido escogido para el equipo de baloncesto.
the word upset. (Point to the sad girl in the
photo.) This girl looks upset. She is not happy.
Why do you think she is upset? (The other girls
are whispering and are not including her.)
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is unexpected.

Say it with me: unexpected. Unexpected
means not predicted, coming as a surprise.
The size of the crowd at the game was
unexpected. Only a few people were expected
to show up, but hundreds came to watch.
2. En espaol, unexpected quiere decir
sorprendente porque no era esperado, no
haba sido predicho, inesperado. Lleg una
cantidad inesperada de espectadores a ver el
partido. Llegaron cientos de personas, pero
pensamos que slo iban a venir unas cuantas.
the word unexpected. (Point to the people
and the car in the photo.) See the people and
car. Notice the hood of the car is up. This
family did not think the car would break down
but it did. The car trouble was unexpected.
430
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about one thing that makes
you fell upset. Use the sentence: I am upset
when
. (Examples include: I
lose a game; I fail a test; I am sick.)
5. Take turns telling your partner words that
mean almost the same as upset. Then tell
each other words that mean the opposite.
(Examples include: samesad, unhappy,
disappointed; oppositehappy, thrilled,
excited)
6. Now lets say upset together three more times:
upset, upset, upset.
Word 2
unexpected
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about something unexpected
that happened that made you happy.
5. Tell your partner about something unexpected
that happened that made you upset.
6. Now lets say unexpected together three more
times: unexpected, unexpected, unexpected.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 1 All About Rules and Laws
rules, respect,
community, law
rules
respect
community
law
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: reglas, respeto, comunidad.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Digital Vision/Getty Images. (tr) Ryan McVay/Getty Images.
(bl) PhotoLink/Getty Images. (br) Arthur S. Aubry/Getty Images.
431
Word 1
imitate
Unit 3 Week 2 Playing With Mike
Word 2
annoy
Word 1
imitate
Unit 3 Week 2 Playing With Mike!
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is imitate. Say it

with me: imitate. Imitate means to copy or
act like someone else. I try to imitate my
favorite singer when I sing a song.
2. En espaol, to imitate quiere decir copiar o
actuar como otra persona, imitar. Trato de
imitar a mi cantante preferido cuando canto
una cancin.
3. To imitate in English and imitar in Spanish are
the word imitate. (Point to the two children
in the photo.) Notice how the boy and girl
have the same positions. They are imitating
each other. The boy imitates the girl and then
the girl imitates the boy.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is annoy. Say

it with me: annoy. Annoy means to bother
or do something to make someone upset or
angry. It annoys me when someone cuts in
front of me in line.
2. En espaol, to annoy quiere decir molestar
o hacerle algo a otra persona hasta que
se disguste, fastidiar. Me fastidia cuando
alguien se cuela en una la enfrente mo.
the word annoy. (Point to girl touching the
other girls hair in the photo.) See how this
girl is touching her classmates hair? She is
annoying the girl by touching her hair. Does it
annoy you when someone touches your hair?
434
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Lars Niki/McGraw-Hill Companies. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. Lets see how well you can imitate what I do.
(Demonstrate some different positions and
have children imitate them.)
6. Now take turns imitating your partner.
7. Now lets say imitate together three more
times: imitate, imitate, imitate.
Word 2
annoy
PARTNER TALK
4. Ask your partner the following question:
What is one thing that annoys you? Use
this sentence starter to answer: It annoys
me when
. Switch roles
and repeat.
5. Take turns telling each other as many words
as you can that mean the same as annoy.
(Examples include: bother, tease, make angry,
upset, aggravate)
6. Now lets say annoy together three more
times: annoy, annoy, annoy.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 2 Our Country, Our Earth
state, country,
ocean, globe
state
country
ocean
globe
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: estado, ocano.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) Mike Agliolo/Corbis.
(bl) DAJ/Getty Images. (br) Cartesia/Photodisc/Getty Images.
435
Word 1
popular
Word 2
unusual
Unit 3 Week 3 I Can Draw!
Word 1
popular
Unit 3 Week 3 I Can Draw!
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is popular. Say it

with me: popular. Popular means liked by
many. We wanted to get tickets to see a
popular band play on Friday night. The band is
so popular that all the tickets were sold out.
2. En espaol, popular quiere decir que
a muchas personas le gusta, popular.
Queramos conseguir boletos para un
concierto de una banda muy popular, pero
es tan popular que los boletos se haban
agotado.
3. Popular in English and popular in Spanish are
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is unusual. Say

it with me: unusual. Unusual means different,
not ordinary, strange, or not common. It is
unusual for a dog to be good friends with a
cat.
2. En espaol, unusual quiere decir diferente,
no ordinario, extrao, poco comn; inusual.
Es inusual ver a un perro llevrselas bien con
un gato.
the word unusual. (Point to grasshopper in
the photo.) Look at this insect. You do not see
many insects that look like this grasshopper. It
looks like a leaf. It is very unusual.
438
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) C Squared Studios/Getty Images. (b) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
the word popular. (Point to the mailbox in
the photo.) Look how full this mailbox is. The
person who owns this mailbox must be very
popular to receive so much mail!
5. Tell your partner the name of a popular star
from television, the movies, or music. Why do
you think this star is popular?
6. What makes someone popular in school? Use
this sentence starter to tell your partner: To be
popular you should
. (Examples
include: be nice to others, help other children,
do well in school, play sports)
7. Now lets say popular together three more
times: popular, popular, popular.
Word 2
unusual
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about the most unusual
animal you ever saw. Describe the animal to
your partner.
5. Do you think it is unusual for a child to use a
computer? Tell your partner what you think
and why.
6. Now lets say unusual together three more
times: unusual, unusual, unusual.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 3 Now and Long Ago
past, history,
pioneer, frontier
past
history
pioneer
frontier
ROUTINE
2. Dene each word in English, referring to the photograph. Incorporate
actions where appropriate.
5. Point out the following cognates: pasado, historia, pionero, frontera.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) John Collier, Jr./Corbis. (tr) Library of Congress/McGraw-Hill Companies.
(bl) American pioneer family, c.1870 (b/w photo), American Photographer, (19th century)/Private Collection, Peter Newark American Pictures/The Bridgeman Art Library International. (br) C. Borland/PhotoLink/Getty Images.
439
Word 1
imagination
Unit 3 Week 4 Dan and the Painting
Word 2
pretend
Word 1
imagination
Unit 3 Week 4 Dan and the Painting
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is imagination. Say

it with me: imagination. Imagination means
the ability to think of ideas or images that
youve never seen or are not real. I dont
always like to paint the things that I see. I like
to use my imagination when I paint pictures.
2. En espaol, imagination quiere decir la
abilidad de pensar en ideas o imgenes
que no has visto antes o que no son reales,
imaginacin. No siempre quiero pintar las
cosas que tengo enfrente o que he visto antes.
Me gusta usar mi imaginacin cuando pinto.
3. Imagination in English and imaginacin in
languages.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is pretend. Say

it with me: pretend. Pretend means to make
believe. Some children like to pretend to be
grownups when they play.
2. En espaol, pretend quiere decir jugar
usando tu imaginacin. A algunos nios
les gusta imaginar que son adultos cuando
juegan.
the word pretend. (Point to each child in the
photo as you ask about him or her.) Look at
these children. They are dressed in costumes.
What is this child pretending to be? (a cow, a
cat, a robot, a witch)
442
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/PunchStock. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
the word imagination. (Point to the paper
cutouts in the photo.) Look at these paper
people. These girls are using their imaginations
to create and play with paper dolls. Since
the dolls are not real, the girls use their
imaginations to give them names and think
about how they would act if they were real.
5. Close your eyes. Use your imagination to
think about what an alien from outer space
might look like. Tell your partner what you
imagined.
6. Suppose you could invent anything you
wanted. Use your imagination to think about
what kind of invention you would make. Tell
your partner what you imagine.
7. Now lets say imagination together three more
times: imagination, imagination, imagination.
Word 2
pretend
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we can y. Lets y around the
room.
5. Now lets pretend we are playing a musical
instrument. Pretend to play your favorite
musical instrument, such as a piano, a guitar,
or the drums. We can pretend were in a band!
6. Now lets say pretend together three more
times: pretend, pretend, pretend.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 4 Goldilocks Learns
the Golden Rule
Golden Rule, house rule,

sharing, chore
Golden Rule
house rule
sharing
chore
ROUTINE
443
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (tr) Jupiter Images/Brand X/Alamy Images.
(bl) Purestock/PunchStock. (br) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
Word 1
compete
Unit 3 Week 5 Kids Like Sports!
Word 2
flexible
Word 1
compete
Unit 3 Week 5 Kids Like Sports!
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is compete. Say it

with me: compete. Compete means to try
to win a contest. My basketball team has a
game on Saturday. We will compete against
another team and see who wins.
2. En espaol, to compete quiere decir tratar
de ganar un concurso, competir. Mi equipo
de baloncesto tendr un partido el domingo.
Competiremos con otro equipo y veremos
quin ganar el partido.
3. To compete in English and competir in Spanish
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is exible. Say

it with me: exible. Flexible means able to
bend without breaking. Usually things made
of rubber, like rubber bands, are exible. You
can twist them many times without them
breaking.
2. En espaol, exible quiere decir capaz de ser
doblado sin partirse, exible. Normalmente
las cosas hechas de caucho, como las gomas,
son exibles. Les puedes dar muchas vueltas
sin que se rompan.
3. Flexible in English and exible in Spanish are
446
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
the word compete. (Point to the football
players in the photo.) The football players
compete against each other. Each team wants
to win the game, so they must compete.
5. Talk about a time you watched two sports
teams compete. Which team did you want to
win? Did your team win?
6. Tell about another event where people
compete that is not a sport. Think about other
kinds of contests where people compete.
What do they compete to do? (Examples
include: spelling bee, writing contest, art
contest, talent show)
7. Now lets say compete together three more
times: compete, compete, compete.
Word 2
flexible
PARTNER TALK
the word exible. (Point to the girl in the
photo.) Look how exible this girls legs are.
She can bend her leg all the way up past her
head.
5. Take turns naming something that is exible,
and then naming something that is not
exible. (exible: straw, rubber hose, rubber
eraser; not exible: metal pole, pencil, crayon)
6. Tell your partner if you think your ngers are
exible. Tell why or why not.
7. Now lets say exible together three more
times: exible, exible, exible.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 5 Martin Luther King, Jr. Day,
Presidents Day, Memorial Day,
Independence Day, Thanksgiving
celebrate, holiday,
parade, reworks
celebrate
holiday
parade
reworks
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: celebrar.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Blend Images/Alamy Images. (tr) Ryan McVay/Getty Images.
(bl) Blend Images/Alamy Images. (br) Comstock/PunchStock.
447
Word 1
bake
Unit 4 Week 1 Pig and Mule
Word 2
snack
Word 1
bake
Unit 4 Week 1 Pig and Mule
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is bake. Say it with

me: bake. Bake means to cook something in
the oven. The baker will bake the bread and
sell it in the bakery.
2. En espaol, to bake quiere decir cocinar algo
en el horno, hornear. El panadero hornear el
pan y lo vender en su panadera.
the word bake. (Point to the cookies on the
tray in the photo.) See these cookies. They
were baked in the oven. They have to be
careful because the oven is hot. They are
wearing gloves to protect their hands.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is snack. Say it

with me: snack. Snack means a small amount
of food you usually eat in between meals.
In school we have a snack a couple of hours
before lunch.
2. En espaol, snack quiere decir una cantidad
pequea de comida que se come entre
comidas, un tentempi. En la escuela
comemos un tentempi un par de horas antes
del almuerzo.
the word snack. (Point to the different foods
in the photo as you talk about each.) These
are all healthy snacks you can eat in between
meals. This snack is yogurt. (Point to and
name the other snacks.)
450
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Reed Kaestner/Corbis. (b) Ken Karp/McGraw-Hill Companies.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets look at the picture again. This family is
baking cookies. Lets act out baking bread.
We can mix the dough. Now lets make a loaf
of bread and put it on a pan. Now lets put
the pan in the oven to bake the bread.
5. Now lets pretend that our bread is baked.
Lets act out getting a glove and taking the
baked bread out of the oven. Be careful. Its
hot! We can slice our bread and eat it.
6. Now lets say bake together three more times:
bake, bake, bake.
Word 2
snack
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner what your favorite snack for
school is. Why do you like that fruit to eat as a
snack?
5. Look at the picture again. Which snack in the
picture do you like most? Tell your partner by
using the sentence: The snack I like most is
.
6. Now lets say snack together three more
times: snack, snack, snack.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 1 Votes Count!
vote, choice, counted, fair
vote
choice
counted
fair
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: votar, cont.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Comstock/Corbis. (tr) BananaStock/PunchStock.
(bl) Ed-Imaging/McGraw-Hill Companies. (br) Tom Carter/PhotoEdit.
451
Word 1
greets
Unit 4 Week 2 The Pictures
Word 2
old-fashioned
Word 1
greets
Unit 4 Week 2 The Pictures
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is greets. Say it with

me: greets. Greets means welcomes or says
hello to someone in a polite way. The store
owner greets his customers with a smile and a
handshake.
2. En espaol, to greet quiere decir bienvenir o
decirle hola a alguien de una manera educada,
saludar. El dueo de la tienda saluda a sus
clientes con una sonrisa y un apretn de
manos.
the word greets. (Point to the handshaking
gesture in the photo.) See the teacher and
girl. They are shaking hands. The teacher
greets the girl and the girl greets him. What
do you think they are saying to each other?
(Examples include Hello, How are you? or
Welcome.)
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is old-fashioned.

Say it with me: old-fashioned. Old-fashioned
means out of date or from the past. The
play was about life a long time ago, so the
actors wore old-fashioned clothes.
2. En espaol, old-fashioned quiere decir
pasado de moda, del pasado, anticuado.
La obra de teatro era sobre la vida hace
muchos aos, entonces los actores vistieron
trajes anticuados.
the word old-fashioned. (Point to the
typewriter the photo.) It shows an old
typewriter. This is an old-fashioned tool
people used to write letters. What do we use
today instead of a typewriter? (computer)
454
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ken Cavanagh/McGraw-Hill Companies. (b) Bettmann/Corbis.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets act out that we are meeting a new
classmate. Lets greet our new classmate by
shaking hands and smiling. Partners can take
turns being the new classmate and greeting
the new classmate.
5. Now lets act out that we are greeting a
family member we have not seen in a long
time. We can act out hugging our family
member and smiling to greet him or her.
6. Now lets say greets together three more
times: greets, greets, greets.
Word 2
old-fashioned
PARTNER TALK
4. Today we use electric lamps to light our
houses. Before electricity we used the oldfashioned way to light our houses. We used
candles. Talk with your partner about which
way of lighting your house you think is better:
lamps or the old-fashioned way. Tell why you
think so.
5. Tell your partner some words that mean
almost the same as old-fashioned. Then
name some words that mean the opposite.
(Examples include: sameold, past, out-of
date, long ago; oppositenew, modern, now,
up-to-date.)
6. Now lets say old-fashioned together three
more times: old-fashioned, old-fashioned,
old-fashioned.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 2 Voting in a Community
leader, mayor,
governor, president
leader
mayor
governor
president
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: lider, gobernador, presidente.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Pixland/PunchStock. (tr) Jill Braaten/McGraw-Hill Companies.
(bl) Jill Braaten/McGraw-Hill Companies. (br) Comstock/PunchStock.
455
Word 1
place
Unit 4 Week 3 Teams
Word 2
sells
Word 1
place
Unit 4 Week 3 Teams
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is place. Say it with

me: place. Place means a certain location
or spot where things happen or people go
to. Our classroom is the place where we
learn. The gym is the place where we play
basketball.
2. En espaol, place quiere decir un sitio o
punto donde cosas ocurren o donde van
personas, lugar. Nuestro saln es el lugar
donde aprendemos. El gimnasio es el lugar
donde jugamos baloncesto.
the word place. (Point to stadium in the
photo.) See this big stadium. It is a football
stadium. This is the place where people go to
play and watch football games. Have you ever
been to a place like this?
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about one place you like to
go to play with friends. Where is this place?
What is it like? Why do you like it? (Examples
include: playground, friends home, your
room, the park, the soccer eld)
5. Talk about the different places you have been
to see a game or sport. What game or sport
did you see? What was the place like?
6. Now lets say place together three more times:
place, place, place.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is sells. Say it

with me: sells. Sells means put out for people
to buy. The supermarket sells food. The toy
store sells toys.
2. En espaol, to sell quiere decir sacar o
mostrar para que la gente compre, vender.
El supermercado vende comida. La juguetera
vende juguetes.
the word sells. (Point to the skis in the photo.)
It shows the inside of a sporting goods store.
This store sells skis.
Word 2
sells
PARTNER TALK
4. Look back at the picture. This only shows part
of the sporting goods store. Talk with your
partner about other things a sporting goods
store sells. (Examples include: baseballs, tennis
rackets, helmets)
5. Tell your partner about your favorite store.
Tell each other what it sells.
6. Now lets say sells together three more times:
sells, sells, sells.
458
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Visions of America/Joe Sohm/Digital Vision/Alamy Images. (b) Digital Vision/Thomas Northcut/Getty Images.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 3 My Matter Book
matter, solid, liquid, gas
matter
solid
liquid
gas
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: materia, slido, lquido, gas.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Cultura/PunchStock. (tr) Jamie Grill/Corbis.
(bl) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (br) Tim Keatley/Alamy Images.
459
Word 1
kinds
Unit 4 Week 4 A Frog Grows and Changes
Word 2
tiny
Word 1
kinds
Unit 4 Week 4 A Frog Grows and Changes
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is kinds. Say it

with me: kinds. Kinds means types, groups,
categories, or examples. There are many
different kinds of dogs. Some kinds of dogs
are big. Some kinds of dogs are small.
2. En espaol, kinds quiere decir tipos, grupos,
categoras o ejemplos. Hay muchos tipos
diferentes de perros. Algunos tipos de perros
son grandes. Otros tipos de perros son
pequeos.
the word kinds. (Point to frogs in the photo.)
There are many different kinds of frogs. This
picture shows one kind of frog.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is tiny. Say it

with me: tiny. Tiny means very small, little.
The bug was so tiny I could hardly see it!
2. En espaol, tiny quiere decir decir muy
pequeo, diminuto. El insecto era tan
diminuto que casi no lo poda ver!
the word tiny. (Point to the frog the photo.) It
shows a tiny frog. You can tell the frog is tiny
because it ts inside a ower.
462
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/PunchStock. (b) Photodisc/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. There are many different kinds of food. For
example, one kind of food is fruit. Another
kind is meat. Talk with your partner about the
different kinds of food you have eaten.
5. See how many different kinds of animals
you and your partner can name. Take turns
naming the different kinds.
6. Now lets say kinds together three more times:
kinds, kinds, kinds.
Word 2
tiny
PARTNER TALK
4. Look around the room. Name an object. Then
your partner will name an object that is tiny
compared to the one you named. Switch roles
and repeat.
5. Take turns naming tiny animals. How many
can you and your partner name? (Examples
include: y, mouse, frog, buttery, hamster)
6. Now lets say tiny together three more times:
tiny, tiny, tiny.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 4 Wells Fargo History Museum
museum, stagecoach,
travel, mail
museum
stagecoach
travel
mail
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: museo.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) BananaStock/PunchStock. (tr) Bettmann/Corbis.
(bl) Dynamic Graphics/Jupiterimages. (br) Lawrence Manning/Corbis.
463
Word 1
nibbled
Unit 4 Week 5 Lenny and Molly
Word 2
roar
Word 1
nibbled
Unit 4 Week 5 Lenny and Molly
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is nibbled. Say it

with me: nibbled. Nibbled means ate in fast
little bites. The mouse nibbled at the cheese.
2. En espaol, to nibble quiere decir comer con
mordizcos pequeos y rpidos, mordisquear.
El ratn mordisque el queso.
the word nibbled. (Point to plate of food in
the photo.) It shows tiny bits of food. The
baby nibbled the food one little bit at a time.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is roar. Say it

with me: roar. Roar means a loud growl.
The lions in the zoo sometimes let out roars
when people walk by.
2. En espaol, roar quiere decir decir el sonido
que produce un len, rujido. Los leones en el
zoolgico a veces sueltan rujidos cuando las
personas pasan por sus jaulas.
the word roar. (Point to the tiger the photo.)
It shows a how a tiger looks when it lets out
a roar. Lets all let out a roar like the tigers.
(Have children roar.)
466
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/Jupiterimages. (b) Creatas Images/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets think that we have a plate of grapes.
Lets act out how we nibble the grapes.
5. Now lets think that we have a big piece of
watermelon. Lets nibble at the watermelon.
Remember when we nibble we take small,
quick bites.
6. Now lets say nibbled together three more
times: nibbled, nibbled, nibbled.
Word 2
roar
PARTNER TALK
4. Look back at the picture. Talk to your partner
about why the tiger might roar. (Examples
include: the lion sees another animal, the lion
is protecting itself)
5. Take turns naming animals that roar. Use
the sentence: A
can roar. (Examples
include: lion, tiger, leopard, jaguar)
6. Now lets say roar together three more times:
roar, roar, roar.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 5 Do All Plants Need the Same Things to Grow?
stem, leaves,
seeds, roots
stem
leaves
seeds
roots
ROUTINE
467
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Ingram Publishing/Alamy Images. (tr) Image Source Black/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Ingram Publishing/PunchStock. (br) Ken Cavanagh/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Word 1
gases
Unit 5 Week 1 The Sun
Word 2
sunblock
Word 1
gases
Unit 5 Week 1 The Sun
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is gases. Say it with

me: gases. Gases means things that are not
a solid or a liquid; substances like air. Have
you ever seen water boil? The smoky air that
comes out is a gas.
2. En espaol, gases quiere cosas que no son
ni slidas ni lquidas, sustancias como el aire,
gases. Haz visto el agua hervir? El humo que
le sale es un gas.
3. Gases in English and gases in Spanish are
the word gases (Point to the gases coming
from the sun in the photo.) The sun is very
hot. This picture shows what the gases that
come from the sun look like.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is sunblock. Say

it with me: sunblock. Sunblock is a cream that
stops the rays of the sun from burning your
skin. You should always protect your skin with
sunblock when you are out in the sun.
2. En espaol, sunblock quiere decir crema que
previene que los rayos del sol quemen la piel,
bloqueador solar. Siempre deberan proteger
su piel con bloqueador cuando estn afuera.
the word sunblock. (Point to the bottle in the
photo.) See the mother rubbing her daughters
back. She is putting this sunblock on her back
so that the sun does not burn her daughters
skin.
470
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Naval Research Laboratory. (b) Blend Images/Ariel Skelley/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Steam from water is a gas. Talk to your
partner about how you can get steam from a
pot of water. (Heat the water until the steam
forms.)
6. Do you think re is a gas? Tell your partner if
you do. Tell why or why not. (Example: Yes,
because it is not solid or liquid. It is like hot
air.)
7. Now lets say gases together three more times:
gases, gases, gases.
Word 2
sunblock
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner if you think the term
sunblock is a good term to describe the bottle
the woman is holding in the picture. Tell why
or why not.
5. Talk about why it is important to use
sunblock. Tell when and where you should
use it.
6. Now lets say sunblock together three more
times: sunblock, sunblock, sunblock.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 1 Amazing Animals
gills, ns, webbed, spines
gills
ns
webbed
spines
ROUTINE
471
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Dan Burton/Alamy Images. (tr) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages.
(bl) National Geographic/Getty Images. (br) Digital Archive Japan/Alamy Images.
Word 1
invented
Word 2
message
Unit 5 Week 2 Mr. Bells Telephone
Word 1
invented
Unit 5 Week 2 Mr. Bells Telephone
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is invented. Say it

with me: invented. Invented means made
something that never existed before.
Alexander Bell invented the telephone. Before
he invented this machine, telephones did not
exist.
2. En espaol, to invent quiere decir hacer algo
que no exista antes, inventar. Puedes hacer
una nueva mquina. Alexander Bell invent el
telfono. Antes que l lo inventara, el telfono
no exista.
3. To invent in English and inventar in Spanish
the word invented. (Point to the telephone
in the photo.) This is a picture of the rst
telephone Alexander Bell invented.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is message. Say

it with me: message. A message is something
you want to communicate. A message can be
given in writing, in speaking, or by gestures.
Mother wrote a message to Stan and left it on
the table.
2. En espaol, message quiere decir lo que
quieres comunicar, mensaje. Un mensaje
puede ser escrito, dicho o expresado con
gestos. Mam le escribi un mensaje a Stan y
lo dej sobre la mesa.
3. Message in English and mensaje in Spanish are
the word message. (Point to the woman.) See
the mother talking on the phone. When she
speaks on the phone she is giving someone a
message.
474
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stefano Bianchetti//Corbis. (b) PhotoAlto Agency/David Laurens/PictureQuest.
PARTNER TALK
5. Talk with your partner about other things that
you are glad were invented. Use the sentence:
I am glad the
was invented.
6. Choose one of the things you and your
partner named and tell why you are glad it
was invented. Use the sentence: I am glad the
was invented because
.
7. Now lets say invented together three more
times: invented, invented, invented.
Word 2
message
MOVEMENT
5. Lets act out giving your partner a message on
the phone. Then switch roles and repeat.
6. Now lets use our faces and bodies to act out a
message for a partner. Your partner has to tell
you what your message is.
7. Now lets say message together three more
times: message, message, message.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 2 Needs and Wants
needs, wants, trade, money
needs
wants
trade
money
ROUTINE
475
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Ken Karp/McGraw-Hill Companies. (tr) Tim Hall/Getty Images.
(bl) JLP/Jose L. Pelaez/Corbis. (br) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Word 1
dangerous
Unit 5 Week 3 Whats the Weather?
Word 2
storm
Word 1
dangerous
Unit 5 Week 3 Whats the Weather?
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is dangerous.

Say it with me: dangerous. If something is
dangerous, it can hurt you or cause harm. It
is very dangerous to play with matches. You
could start a re.
2. En espaol, dangerous quiere decir que
puede causar lesin o dao, peligroso. Es
peligroso jugar con fsforos. Podras empezar
un incendio.
word dangerous. (Point to the lightning in
the photo.) Look at the lightning. Lightning is
dangerous. It can strike things on the ground
and cause res.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is storm. Say

it with me: storm. Storm means a type of
weather that has strong winds and rain or
snow. We ran for cover when we saw the
storm coming.
2. En espaol, storm quiere decir una condicin
del clima con vientos fuertes y lluvia o nieve,
tormenta. Corrimos a casa cuando vimos que
se acercaba la tormenta.
the word storm. (Point to the trees and
ooding in the photo.) It shows what it is like
in a storm. See the trees. They are bent from
the strong winds. And look at all the water.
This storm caused ooding, too.
478
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Jeremy Woodhouse/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Warren Faidley/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk with your partner about what you would
do if you saw dangerous lightning like in
the photo. (They should go inside as soon as
possible to avoid being struck.)
5. Take turns completing the following sentence:
It is dangerous to
. (Examples
include: play with matches, walk alone at
night, talk to strangers. Be sure to stress that
children should never do anything dangerous.)
6. Now lets say dangerous together three more
times: dangerous, dangerous, dangerous.
Word 2
storm
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk with your partner about what it might
feel like if you were caught outside in a storm.
What would you do?
5. Look back at the picture. Talk about the
things in the picture that show there was
a storm. (Examples include: ooding, wind,
cloudy sky, broken trees)
6. Now lets say storm together three more
times: storm, storm, storm.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 3 The Four Seasons
spring, summer, fall, winter
spring
summer
fall
winter
ROUTINE
479
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Masterfile. (tr) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
(bl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
Word 1
forest
Unit 5 Week 4 Trees
Word 2
fruit
Word 1
forest
Unit 5 Week 4 Trees
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is forest. Say it with

me: forest. A forest is a large area of land that
is covered with trees that grow close together.
Small animals such as squirrels and rabbits live
in the forest.
2. En espaol, forest quiere decir un rea de
terreno grande cubierta de rboles que crecen
juntos, bosque. Animales pequeos como las
ardillas y los conejos viven en el bosque.
the word forest. (Point to the trees in the
photo.) Look how many trees there are!
And they are all close together. This picture
shows what a forest looks like from above the
treetops.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is fruit. Say

it with me: fruit. Fruit is a kind of food
that grows on a plant and has seeds. Some
examples of fruits are apples and pears.
2. En espaol, fruit quiere decir un tipo de
alimento que crece en lo rboles y tiene
semillas, fruta. Algunos ejemplos de frutas
son las manzanas y las peras.
3. Fruit in English and fruta in Spanish are
the word fruit. (Point to the apples on the tree
branch in the photo.) See these apples. They
are a kind of fruit that grows on trees. Some
fruits, like strawberries, do not grow on trees.
They grow on vines along the ground.
482
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Plan/PunchStock. (b) Photodisc/James P. Blair/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture again. Talk with your
partner about what a forest looks like. How
do you think it might feel to walk through
a forest? What do you think you would see?
(Examples include: lots of trees, green, shady;
cool, damp; squirrels, rabbits, deer, trees,
plants)
5. Tell your partner if you would or would not
like to visit a forest. Tell why or why not. (Yes,
because the animals and the plants would be
beautiful and interesting. No, because I could
get lost.)
6. Now lets say forest together three more
times: forest, forest, forest.
Word 2
fruit
PARTNER TALK
5. Take turns naming different kinds of fruits.
See how many you and your partner can
name.
6. Describe your favorite fruit to your partner,
but do not say its name. When your partner
guesses the fruit, switch roles and repeat.
7. Now lets say fruit together three more times:
fruit, fruit, fruit.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 4 Measure the Weather
thermometer, temperature,
rain gauge, weather vane
thermometer
temperature
rain gauge
weather vane
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: termmetro, temperatura.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (tr) Comstock/PunchStock.
(bl) Johner Images/PunchStock. (br) Rob Melnychuk/Getty Images.
483
Word 1
food
Unit 5 Week 5 Living Things
Word 2
soil
Word 1
food
Unit 5 Week 5 Living Things
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is food. Say it with

me: food. Food means the thing that gives
people and animals nourishment. All people
and animals need food to live. People eat
many different kinds of food, such as meat,
fruit, and vegetables.
2. En espaol, food quiere decir lo que nutre a
los animales y las personas, comida. Todas las
personas y los animales necesitan comida para
vivir. La gente come muchos tipos diferentes
de comida como carnes, frutas y vegetales.
the word food. (Point to grapes on the vines in
the photo.) This picture shows a kind of food
that grows on vines. These are grapes. Some
food grows in the ground, such as potatoes.
Another kind of food is meat. We get meat
from animals.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets act out that we are picking food like
fruits from trees. We have to reach high to get
some. Then lets pick food like carrots from
the ground. We have to bend down and pull
them out of the ground
5. Now lets act out that we are eating some
food. First lets eat some corn on the cob.
Now lets have a slice of pizza. What other
food shall we pretend to eat? (Take several
suggestions from children and act out eating
the food.)
6. Now lets say food together three more times:
food, food, food.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is soil. Say it

with me: soil. Soil is the dirt we plant things in.
Soil has nutrients in it that help plants grow.
2. En espaol, soil quiere decir el material del
suelo en el que plantamos cosas, tierra. La
tierra tiene nutrientes que ayudan a que las
plantas crezcan.
the word soil. This family digs in the soil. Then
they plant the owers in the soil.
soil
MOVEMENT
4. Look at the picture. Lets act out that we are
helping this family dig the soil. Lets dig the
soil so that we can plant the owers.
5. Now lets act out helping them plant the
owers. First put the owers in the soil. Then
cover the roots of the owers with the soil
that you dug.
6. Now lets say soil together three more times:
soil, soil, soil.
486
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Bob Nichols/USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 5 Ball Games in Mexico
game, soccer,
court, stadium
game
soccer
court
stadium
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: estadio.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Valueline/PunchStock. (tr) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock.
(bl) Flint/Corbis. (br) The Stock Connection RM/PunchStock.
487
Word 1
animals
Unit 6 Week 1 The Show
Word 2
family
Word 1
animals
Unit 6 Week 1 The Show
PARTNER TALK
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is animals. Say

it with me: animals. Animals means living
beings that are not plants. Some animals can
be pets, but some cannot. Cats and lions are
animals.
2. En espaol, animals quiere decir los seres
vivientes que no son plantas, animales.
Algunos animales pueden ser mascotas, pero
otros no. Los gatos y los leones son animales.
3. Animals in English and animales in Spanish are
the word animals. (Point to the bears.) See the
bears. Bears are animals. They are living things
that move and eat. They are dangerous; they
cannot live in the house.
5. Take turns naming different kinds of pets. See

how many you and your partner can name.
6. Talk to your partner about your favorite
animal. Tell what it looks like, what it sounds
like, and where it lives.
7. Now lets say animals together three more
times: animals, animals, animals.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is family. Say

it with me: family. Family means a group
of people who are all related. People
who belong to the same family usually like
doing things together. My family has dinner
together every night.
2. En espaol, family quiere decir un grupo
de personas relacionadas, una familia. Las
personas que pertencen a la misma familia
normalmente hacen cosas juntas. Mi familia
cena junta todas las noches.
3. Family in English and familia in Spanish are
the word family. (Point to each family
member.) The members of this family are the
grandmother, grandfather, mother, father,
and two children.
family
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner what are some things that
families do together. Which are the most fun?
6. Talk to your partner about a family party
that you might plan. How would you chose
the foods to eat and games to play. Be sure
there are foods and games for everyone in the
family.
7. Now lets say family together three more
times: family, family, family
490
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Tom Brakefield/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc/Adam Crowley/Getty Images.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 1 Goods and Services
work, job,
goods, services
work
job
goods
services
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: servicios.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) SW Productions/Getty Images. (tr) Ryan McVay/Getty Images.
(bl) Photo: Michael Evans/Life File/Getty Images. (br) Pixtal/age fotostock.
491
Word 1
contest
Word 2
excited
Unit 6 Week 2 Dawn Can Skate
Word 1
contest
Unit 6 Week 2 Dawn Can Skate
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is contest. Say it

with me: contest. A contest is an event, a
game, or a sport that you try to win in. The
winner of the spelling contest gets a gold
medal.
2. En espaol, contest quiere decir un evento,
un juego o un deporte en el que tratas de
ganar; concurso. El ganador del concurso de
deletreo recibir una medalla de oro.
the word contest. (Point to the skater in the
photo.) See the girl ice-skating. She is in an
ice-skating contest, or competition. She is
trying to be the best skater in the contest.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is excited. Say

it with me: excited. Excited means eager,
thrilled, or happy about something that is
happening or is about to happen. Thomas is
excited that he is getting a new puppy.
2. En espaol, excited quiere decir animado
o contento por algo que ha ocurrido o va a
ocurrir, emocionado. Toms est emocionado
por el nuevo cachorro que va a recibir.
the word excited. (Point to the boy in the
photo.) It shows a boy who is excited. What
do you think he is excited about? (Examples
include: He won a contest. His team won a
game.)
494
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stone/Soren Hald/Getty Images. (b) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a contest you were
in or one that you saw. What did you or the
others have to do to win the contest?
5. Look at the picture again. What do you
think this girl did to get ready for this ice
skating contest? Do you think she will win the
contest? Why or why not?
6. Now lets say contest together three more
times: contest, contest, contest.
Word 2
excited
MOVEMENT
4. Lets look at the picture again. Lets all
pretend we are as excited as the boy in the
photo. Lets try to look like he does.
5. Now lets pretend someone famous is coming
to visit our class. (You may wish to have
children suggest who might visit.) Lets see
how excited we can act before the famous
person gets here!
6. Now lets say excited together three more
times: excited, excited, excited.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 2 A New Kid on the Block
immigrants, cooperation,
caring, understanding
immigrants
cooperation
caring
understanding
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: inmigrantes, cooperacin.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Bettmann/Corbis. (tr) liquidlibrary/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
495
Word 1
mill
Unit 6 Week 3 Save Paper, Save Trees
Word 2
recycling
Word 1
mill
Unit 6 Week 3 Save Paper, Save Trees
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is mill. Say it with

me: mill. A mill is a machine where natural
materials such as trees, cotton, or grain are
ground into little pieces. The little pieces are
then made into products like paper, fabric,
or our. The trees taken to the paper mill are
made into paper.
2. En espaol, mill quiere decir la mquina en
la que materiales naturales como rboles,
algodn o granos son picados en pedacitos
chiquitos; molino. Estos pedacitos chiquitos
luego se usan para hacer productos como
papel, tela y harina. Los rboles son llevados al
molino para hacer papel.
the word mill. (Point to the mill in the photo.)
See the paper mill. It has different buildings
and smoke stacks. The mill turns trees into
paper.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about some things you use
that might have been made in a paper mill.
Use the sentence: My
was made in
a paper mill.
5. Talk about why a paper mill is important.
What would happen if there were no paper
mills? (Paper mills are important because they
make paper from trees. Without paper mills
we would not have things like notebooks,
books, or newspapers.)
6. Now lets say mill together three more times:
mill, mill, mill.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is recycling.

Say it with me: recycling. Recycling means
making used material into something new.
We recycle things so that they can be used
again instead of wasted or thrown away.
Recycling paper helps to save our trees.
2. En espaol, to recycle quiere decir convertir
algo que ha sido usado en algo nuevo,
reciclar. Reciclamos cosas para que puedan
ser usadas de nuevo en vez de botadas a la
basura. Reciclar el papel ayuda a conservar
rboles.
3. To recycle in English and reciclar in Spanish
the word recycling. (Point to the pack of
paper in the photo.) A girl is getting a stack of
newspapers ready for recycling.
Word 2
recycling
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner another kind of material,
besides paper, that gets recycled. Use the
sentence: We recycle paper and
.
(Examples include: cans, plastic, glass)
6. Talk with your partner about why recycling
is important. (Recycling helps save our trees,
cuts down on garbage, and makes Earth
cleaner. It uses things again instead of
throwing them away.)
7. Now lets say recycling together three more
times: recycling, recycling, recycling.
498
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/Visions of America/Joe Sohm/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/Janie Airey/Getty Images.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 3 What Animals Eat Plants?
herbivore, teeth,
carnivore, omnivore
herbivore
teeth
carnivore
omnivore
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: herbvoro, carnvoro, omnvoro.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (tr) Creatas Images/PunchStock.
(bl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) Stephen Lackie/Corbis.
499
Word 1
bands
Unit 6 Week 4 The Beautiful Buttery
Word 2
Painted Lady
Word 1
bands
Unit 6 Week 4 The Beautiful Buttery
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is bands. Say it with

me: bands. Bands are rings of color. Zebras
look like they have black bands or stripes
around their bodies.
2. En espaol, bands quiere decir aros de
color, listas. Las cebras tienen listas negras
alrededor de sus cuerpos.
the word bands. (Point to the caterpillar in the
photo.) See the caterpillar. It has green and
black bands.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is Painted

Lady. Say it with me: Painted Lady. A Painted
Lady is a kind of buttery. Most Painted Lady
butteries are orange and black and white.
2. En espaol, Painted Lady se dice Mariposa
Vanessa. Una Mariposa Vanessa es un tipo
de mariposa. Estas mariposas son anaranjadas
con negro y blanco.
Painted Lady. (Point to the buttery in the
photo.) This is a Painted Lady buttery.
502
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Leo Fiedler/Corbis. (b) Robert Marien/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about some things that have
bands. (Examples include: caterpillars, zebras,
clothing with stripes, tigers)
5. Tell your partner another word that means the
same as bands. Use the sentence: Bands are
like
. (Examples include: rings, stripes)
6. Now lets say bands together three more
times: bands, bands, bands.
Word 2
Painted Lady
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture again. Talk with your
partner about what the Painted Lady looks
like.
5. Tell if you think Painted Lady is a good name
for this buttery. Tell why or why not.
6. Now lets say Painted Lady together three
more times: Painted Lady, Painted Lady,
Painted Lady.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 4 The First Americans
Native American, nation,

canoe, moccasins
Native American
nation
canoe
moccasins
ROUTINE
2. Dene each word in English, referring to the photograph. Incorporate actions
where appropriate.
4. Explain how these four words t into a group, or category. During independent
work time, have children write sentences for each word.
5. Point out the following cognates: nacin, canoa, mocasines.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) The Paducah Sun, Stephen Lance Dennee/AP Images. (tr) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/The Image Bank/Getty Images.
(bl) Alaska Stock LLC/Alamy Images. (br) Jules Frazier/Photodisc/Getty Images.
503
Word 1
country
Unit 6 Week 5 Fun Days
Word 2
holidays
Word 1
country
Unit 6 Week 5 Fun Days
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is country. Say it

with me: country. Country means a territory
with people and its own government, and that
is separate from other mations; a nation. We
live in the country known as The United States
of America.
2. En espaol, country quiere decir un terriorio
con gente, su propio gobierno y que est
separado de otras naciones; un pas. Nosotros
vivimos en un pas que se llama Estados
Unidos.
the word country. (Point to the globe and
several countries shown.) This is a globe. It
is a round map of the world. The colors on
this globe show some of the countries in the
world. This country is
. (Point to each
country.)
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner the name of a country you or
someone in your family has been to. Describe
what the country was like.
5. People from different countries sometimes
speak the language of their country. Name
one country and the language the people
speak. Use the sentence: In the country of
, many people speak
.
6. Now lets say country together three more
times: country, country, country.
holidays
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is holidays.

Say it with me: holidays. Holidays are days
on which we celebrate special events.
Thanksgiving and the Fourth of July are two
of my favorite holidays.
2. En espaol, holidays se dice das festivos.
Los das festivos son das en los que
celebramos eventos especiales. El Da de
Accin de Gracias y el Da de la Independencia
son dos de mis das festivos preferidos.
the word holidays. (Point to the children and
ags.) It shows how these children celebrate a
holiday called the Fourth of July.
506
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Cartesia/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Ariel Skelley/Blend Images/Getty Images.
4. Take turns with your partner naming other

holidays you celebrate with your family.What
are some things you like to do to celebrate
the Fourth of July? (wave ags, salute, watch
parades)
5. Choose one holiday you like and tell your
partner how you celebrate it.
6. Now lets say holidays together three more
times: holidays, holidays, holidays.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 5 Things Change
freeze, boil, grow, melts
freeze
boil
grow
melts
ROUTINE
507
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Jeremy Hoare/Life File/Getty Images. (tr) David Chasey/Getty Images.
(bl) Jupiter Images/Creatas/Alamy Images. (br) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.

Visual Vocabulary G1 (WWW - Irlanguage.com) PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Visual Vocabulary G1 (WWW - Irlanguage.com) PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Grade 1

Week 1 Key Vocabulary...........................................................................1

Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................181

Week 1 Key Vocabulary........................................................................ 61

Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................251

Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................121

Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................319

English Language Development Vocabulary ... 388A

pudding, cheese, cream,

chorally pronounce the word to focus on articulation

Unit 3 Week 3 Masks All Over the World

1. Display the card.

Unit 1 Week 1 Pam and Sam

Unit 1 Week 1 Pam and Sam

1. One word in the selection is cheerful. Say it

1. Another word in the selection is genuine.

Unit 1 Week 1 Pam and Sam

MacMillan McGraw-Hill photo credits:

Unit 1 Week 1 Pam and Sam

1. Another word in the selection is interest. Say

1. Another word in the selection is prefer. Say it

Unit 1 Week 1 Pam and Sam

1. Another word in the selection is unique. Say it

Function Words and Phrases

Unit 1 Week 1 Pam and Sam

1. In English, we use creep past to describe how

4. I am going to say some sentences. Repeat the

1. In English, we use scamper across to describe

4. I am going to name some places. If you can

Function Words and Phrases

Unit 1 Week 1 Pam and Sam

1. In English, we use crouch in fear to describe

4. I am going to name an event. If it is

1. In English, we use watch in amazement to

4. I am going to name some events. If people

pudding, cheese, cream,

Unit 1 Week 2 I Can, Too!

Unit 1 Week 2 I Can, Too!

1. One word in the selection is energy. Say it

1. Another word in the selection is exhausted.

Unit 1 Week 2 I Can, Too!

Unit 1 Week 2 I Can, Too!

1. Another word in the selection is stretch. Say

1. Another word in the selection is movements.

Unit 1 Week 2 I Can, Too!

1. Another word in the selection is express. Say

Function Words and Phrases

Unit 1 Week 2 I Can, Too!

1. In English, we use high to describe a great

4. I am going to name some things. If they are

1. In English, we use far to describe a great

4. I am going to name pairs of places or things.

Function Words and Phrases

Unit 1 Week 2 I Can, Too!

1. In English, we can use long to describe how

4. I am going to name some activities. If the

1. In English, we use fast to describe speed. Say

4. Lets walk around the room in a line at a

jump, skip, kick,

Unit 1 Week 3 How You Grew

Unit 1 Week 3 How You Grew

1. One word in the selection is adult. Say it with

1. Another word in the selection is change. Say